NeuMR 1.

5T Medical Mag-
netic Resonance Imaging
System User Manual

NEUSOFT MEDICAL SYSTEMS CO., LTD.

NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

About this Manual

1.About the Manual

This manual is a user manual for NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic reso-
nance imaging system. This manual describes the function, safety
and the use of NeuMR 1.5T system. Neusoft Medical Systems Co.,
Ltd. is responsible for NeuMR 1.5T system, but not responsible for
the unauthorized part.

2.How to Use this Manual

The user must read the manual carefully, especially the chapter
about safety instruction, to prevent potential loss or harm. All remind
and warning (bold font) part must be read carefully. In daily opera-
tion, it is recommended that the operator shall refer to this manual at
any time.

WARNING! Warnings are directions that if not followed,

could cause serious or fatal injury to an opera-
tor, patient, or any other person, or could lead to
misdiagnosis.
CAUTION! Cautions are directions that if not followed,
could cause damage to the equipment described
in this manual and/or any other equipment or
goods, and/or cause environmental pollution.

NOTE Notes are used to inform the reader of general

rules or polices NOT related to safely.

This instructions describe the maximum range configuration of the

system, and your system does not necessarily have every feature
described.

3.Copyright

All rights reserved. Neusoft Medical Systems Co. Ltd. reserves the
right to make changes in specifications or to discontinue any product,
NPD-MRI-1301 1 About this Manual
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

at any time without notice or obligation. It's illegal to copy or modify

the contents of this manual without any permission.

5. Revision History

Rev. Issue Date Reasons for Change

A 2020.01 First release

NPD-MRI-1301 2 About this Manual

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome to use the NeuMR 1.5T system................................... 1-1
1.2 EMC(IEC 60601-1-2 Ed4.0:2014)............................................. 1-2
1.3 About the NeuMR 1.5T system................................................. 1-3
1.3.1 Principle of operation ...................................................... 1-3
1.4 Intended use......................................................................... 1-3
1.5 Contraindications ................................................................... 1-4
1.6 Warnings and precautions ....................................................... 1-5
1.7 Compatibility......................................................................... 1-6
1.8 Compliance ........................................................................... 1-6
1.9 Expected lifespan................................................................... 1-6
1.10 Classification ....................................................................... 1-7
1.11 Recycling passport ............................................................... 1-7
1.12 Training .............................................................................1-27

Chapter 2 Safety
2.1 Equipment safety................................................................... 2-1
2.2 EMC performance .................................................................. 2-4
2.2.1 Solutions of the problem involved in EMC........................... 2-6
2.3 Your role in MRI safety ........................................................... 2-6
2.4 Who should know MRI safety................................................... 2-7
2.4.1 MRI safety issues for in-house personnel ........................... 2-8
2.4.2 MRI safety issues for patients........................................... 2-8
2.4.3 MRI safety issues for public safety forces ........................... 2-9
2.4.4 MRI safety issues for other visitors ................................... 2-9
2.5 Electrical safety ..................................................................... 2-9
2.6 Magnet safety ......................................................................2-10
2.6.1 Posting warning signs ....................................................2-11
2.6.2 Gauss lines ...................................................................2-14
2.6.3 Projectiles ....................................................................2-15
2.7 Items affected by magnetic fields............................................2-17
2.7.1 MRI equipment safety symbol .........................................2-18
2.7.2 Third party equipment....................................................2-19
2.7.3 Implants and prostheses ................................................2-20
2.7.4 Make-up, tattoos, shrapnel, and foreign bodies..................2-21
2.8 Operating safely ...................................................................2-21
2.8.1 Patient safety................................................................2-22
2.8.2 Personnel safety............................................................2-22
2.8.3 Patient screening...........................................................2-24
2.8.4 Patient handling ............................................................2-25
2.8.5 Laser warning labels ......................................................2-28
2.9 Patient monitoring ................................................................2-30
2.9.1 Children’s sedation and monitoring ..................................2-31
NPD-MRI-1301 I Content
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2.10 RF heating ........................................................................ 2-32

2.11 Field variations produced by the gradient system ................... 2-33
2.11.1 Informing the patient .................................................. 2-33
2.11.2 Rate of change of the magnetic field.............................. 2-34
2.11.3 What happens if the patient experiences nerve stimulation? . 2-
34
2.12 Operating modes ............................................................... 2-35
2.12.1 SAR warning messages................................................ 2-37
2.12.2 dB/dt warning messages.............................................. 2-40
2.13 Acoustic noise ................................................................... 2-42
2.14 Electrical and mechanical hazards ........................................ 2-43
2.14.1 Symptoms caused by an electrical shock........................ 2-43
2.14.2 Caring for electrical shock victims ................................. 2-43
2.14.3 Electrical fires ............................................................ 2-44
2.15 Explosive hazards .............................................................. 2-44
2.16 Chemical hazards ............................................................... 2-45
2.17 RF hazards ........................................................................ 2-45
2.18 RF enclosure ..................................................................... 2-46
2.19 Cryogen notices ................................................................. 2-46
2.19.1 Liquid helium compressor ............................................ 2-47
2.20 Emergency procedures ....................................................... 2-50
2.20.1 Emergency power stop procedures ................................ 2-50
2.20.2 Emergency magnet quench procedures.......................... 2-51
2.21 Accident reporting procedures.............................................. 2-53
2.22 Image quality .................................................................... 2-54
2.22.1 Instrinsic artifacts ....................................................... 2-54
2.22.2 Extrinsic artifacts ........................................................ 2-54
2.23 Network security................................................................ 2-55
2.23.1 Type ......................................................................... 2-55
2.23.2 Function .................................................................... 2-55
2.23.3 Application................................................................. 2-55
2.23.4 Exchange method ....................................................... 2-55
2.23.5 Security software........................................................ 2-56
2.24 Gradient field .................................................................... 2-56
2.25 B| ▽ B| field ...................................................................... 2-57
2.26 Main field .......................................................................... 2-58

Chapter 3 System
3.1 System composition ............................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Magnet assembly............................................................ 3-1
3.1.2 Patient table .................................................................. 3-1
3.1.3 System cabinet .............................................................. 3-1
3.1.4 GA................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.5 Console......................................................................... 3-2
NPD-MRI-1301 II Content
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

3.1.6 QBC.............................................................................. 3-3

3.1.7 RF receive coils .............................................................. 3-3
3.1.8 LCC .............................................................................. 3-3
3.1.9 Physiology gating ........................................................... 3-3
3.1.10 Intercom ..................................................................... 3-3
3.1.11 MR BOX....................................................................... 3-3
3.2 System operating environment requirements............................. 3-3
3.3 System operation .................................................................. 3-4
3.3.1 Lighted bore ring ............................................................ 3-4
3.3.2 Control panel ................................................................. 3-5
3.3.3 LCD .............................................................................. 3-7
3.3.4 Patient table .................................................................. 3-8
3.3.5 Intercom ......................................................................3-10
3.3.6 MR BOX .......................................................................3-13
3.3.7 System start-up ............................................................3-14
3.3.8 System shut-down/reboot ..............................................3-16

Chapter 4 User Interface

4.1 Home interface...................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 System navigation bar .................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 System status bar .......................................................... 4-2
4.2 Patient management .............................................................. 4-6
4.2.1 Patient examination list ................................................... 4-8
4.2.2 Patient image directory and image preview ........................ 4-8
4.2.3 Image processing ........................................................... 4-9
4.2.4 Patient management......................................................4-10
4.3 Patient registration ...............................................................4-15
4.3.1 Patient examination data list ...........................................4-16
4.3.2 Patient examination information ......................................4-17
4.4 Patient examination ..............................................................4-20
4.4.1 Patient information ........................................................4-21
4.4.2 Sequence information ....................................................4-22
4.4.3 Positioning....................................................................4-23
4.4.4 Scan queue ..................................................................4-25
4.4.5 Parameter editing area...................................................4-28
4.4.6 Parameter conflict display ...............................................4-40
4.4.7 Command panel ............................................................4-41
4.5 Image viewing and post processing .........................................4-41
4.5.1 2D...............................................................................4-41
4.5.2 MPR.............................................................................4-54
4.5.3 3D viewer.....................................................................4-62
4.5.4 Diffusion weighted imaging .............................................4-73
4.5.5 Functional magnetic resonance imaging............................4-75
4.5.6 Image splice .................................................................4-80
4.6 Advanced clinical function ......................................................4-81

NPD-MRI-1301 III Content

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.6.1 BrainQuant .................................................................. 4-81

4.6.2 MRS ........................................................................... 4-84
4.6.3 BOLD fmri ................................................................... 4-85
4.6.4 DTI............................................................................. 4-87
4.6.5 SWI and SWIM............................................................. 4-90
4.6.6 PWI (DSC)................................................................... 4-91
4.6.7 ASL ............................................................................ 4-93
4.6.8 CS MRA and CS MRCP ................................................... 4-94
4.6.9 Smart BrainQuant......................................................... 4-95
4.6.10 SmartEnhance DWI..................................................... 4-96
4.6.11 Smart HDDWI ............................................................ 4-96
4.6.12 Clear Thrive ............................................................... 4-97
4.6.13 SmartEnhance DFFE.................................................... 4-97
4.7 Film printing ....................................................................... 4-97
4.7.1 Information bar ............................................................ 4-97
4.7.2 Tool panel ................................................................... 4-98
4.7.3 Print ..........................................................................4-100
4.7.4 Select mode ...............................................................4-100
4.7.5 Edit ...........................................................................4-101
4.7.6 Right-click menu .........................................................4-102
4.8 Report...............................................................................4-103
4.8.1 Information bar ...........................................................4-103
4.8.2 Tool panel ..................................................................4-104
4.8.3 Case template.............................................................4-104
4.8.4 General workflow of report ...........................................4-105
4.8.5 Report template editor .................................................4-106

Chapter 5 Receive Coils

5.1 An overview of the receive coils ............................................... 5-1
5.1.1 AIM NV ......................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 AIM Spine...................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 AIM Torso...................................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 AIM GP Flex M................................................................ 5-4
5.1.5 AIM GP Flex S ................................................................ 5-5
5.1.6 AIM Loop Flex ................................................................ 5-5
5.1.7 Shoulder Coil ................................................................. 5-6
5.1.8 Breast Coil..................................................................... 5-6
5.1.9 Knee Coil....................................................................... 5-7
5.1.10 Head Coil..................................................................... 5-7
5.2 Use of the receive coils ........................................................... 5-8
5.2.1 Precautions.................................................................... 5-8
5.2.2 Receive coils storage..................................................... 5-10
5.2.3 Moving the receive coils ................................................ 5-11
5.2.4 Mattress...................................................................... 5-11
5.3 Connecting and removing the receive coils .............................. 5-12

NPD-MRI-1301 IV Content
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5.3.1 Connect to the patient table............................................5-12

5.3.2 Removing the receive coils..............................................5-16
5.4 Regular examination positioning .............................................5-18
5.4.1 Head and spine examination ...........................................5-19
5.4.2 Head examination with Head Coil.....................................5-21
5.4.3 Neck examination ..........................................................5-25
5.4.4 Body examination..........................................................5-28
5.4.5 Hip and prostate examination..........................................5-32
5.4.6 Abdomen and pelvic examination.....................................5-36
5.4.7 Whole body examination ................................................5-39
5.4.8 Breast examination........................................................5-43
5.4.9 Shoulder examination ....................................................5-52
5.4.10 Elbow examination.......................................................5-56
5.4.11 Wrist examination........................................................5-64
5.4.12 Knee examination ........................................................5-72
5.4.13 Ankle examination .......................................................5-80

Chapter 6 Scan
6.1 Preparation for scanning ......................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Non-magnetic equipment ................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Informing the patient ...................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Special cases ................................................................. 6-2
6.2 Patient preparation ................................................................ 6-3
6.2.1 Patient positioning .......................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Patient registration ......................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 Positioning window ......................................................... 6-4
6.2.4 Selection sequence ......................................................... 6-4
6.2.5 Sequence parameter editing ............................................ 6-7
6.3 Scanning Process ................................................................... 6-7
6.3.1 Start scan ..................................................................... 6-7
6.3.2 End scan ....................................................................... 6-7
6.3.3 Image viewing and post processing................................... 6-7
6.3.4 Management.................................................................. 6-7
6.3.5 Move the patient from the magnet bore............................. 6-8
6.4 Imaging sequence ................................................................. 6-8
6.4.1 Spin echo ...................................................................... 6-8
6.4.2 Turbo spin echo ............................................................. 6-9
6.4.3 Inversion recovery turbo spin echo ................................... 6-9
6.4.4 Fast field echo................................................................ 6-9
6.4.5 Echo planar imaging ......................................................6-10
6.4.6 Dual fast field echo ........................................................6-11
6.4.7 Balanced fast field echo..................................................6-11
6.4.8 DIXON .........................................................................6-12
6.4.9 THRIVE ........................................................................6-12

NPD-MRI-1301 V Content
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 7 Optional parts and accessories

7.1 Patient table interface and accessory connection ........................ 7-1
7.1.1 Alarm ball...................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Headphone .................................................................... 7-3
7.1.3 Physiology gating ........................................................... 7-3
7.1.4 Strap ............................................................................ 7-5
7.1.5 Infusion rod ................................................................... 7-6
7.2 Mattress and accessory........................................................... 7-7

Chapter 8 System maintenance

8.1 Routine system maintenance................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Basic quality assurance ................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Daily quality assurance.................................................... 8-5
8.2 Periodic system maintenance................................................... 8-7
8.3 Stability test ......................................................................... 8-8
8.3.1 Testing tools .................................................................. 8-9
8.3.2 Testing conditions........................................................... 8-9
8.3.3 Testing methods............................................................. 8-9

Chapter 9 Cleaning and disinfecting

9.1 Cleaning ............................................................................... 9-2
9.1.1 Cleaning process ............................................................ 9-2
9.2 Disinfecting........................................................................... 9-3
9.2.1 Disinfectant and compatibility .......................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Disinfection process ........................................................ 9-5
9.3 Cleaning and disinfection of system components and accessories . 9-6
9.3.1 Patient table .................................................................. 9-6
9.3.2 Mattresses..................................................................... 9-6
9.3.3 Coils ............................................................................. 9-6
9.3.4 Magnet bore .................................................................. 9-7
9.3.5 Headphone and alarm ball ............................................... 9-7
9.3.6 Connetors ..................................................................... 9-7

Chapter 10 Appendices
10.1 Product disposal................................................................. 10-1
10.1.1 Passing the NeuMR 1.5T system on to an other user........ 10-1
10.1.2 Final disposal of NeuMR 1.5T ........................................ 10-2
10.2 Glossary ........................................................................... 10-2
10.2.1 Abbreviations ............................................................. 10-3
10.2.2 MRI and computer terminology .................................... 10-6
10.3 Labels on the NeuMR 1.5T ..................................................10-13

NPD-MRI-1301 VI Content
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Welcome to use the NeuMR 1.5T system

We hope that you gain all the benefits the NeuMR 1.5T medical mag-
netic resonance imaging system offers.

NPD-MRI-1301 1-1 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 1-1 System Label

There are three different voltage configurations in NeuMR 1.5T sys-
tem in international market, namely AC380V, AC400V and AC415V.
It will configure the proper NeuMR 1.5T MRI system for you according
to your country’s voltage standard. The following figures are the
labels of our MRI System on three voltage configurations.

NOTE The mains voltage for MRI System will subject to

change according to local mains voltage, and the
label will change too. But output voltage is
invariable.

1.2 EMC(IEC 60601-1-2 Ed4.0:2014)

EMC(EN 60601-1-2 2015)
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic
emissions - for magnetic resonance imaging system. The NeuMR
1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging system is intended for use
in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of the NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging
system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic
immunity -for magnetic resonance imaging system. The NeuMR 1.5T
medical magnetic resonance imaging system is intended for use in
the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or

NPD-MRI-1301 1-2 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

the user of magnetic resonance imaging system should assure that it

is used in such an environment.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic
immunity -for magnetic resonance imaging system that are not LIFE
-SUPPORTING and are specified for use only in a shielded location.
The NeuMR 1.5T mecical magnetic resonance imaging system is
intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic reso-
nance imaging system should assure that it is used in such an envi-
ronment.

1.3 About the NeuMR 1.5T system

The NeuMR 1.5T system is our new generation self-shielded super-
conductive MRI system. Conformity evaluation proves the system
meets the requirements of MDD93/42/EEC.

NOTE The figures in the Instructions for Use are simply

the diagrams which might be different from the
real corresponding configurations. If any differ-
ence appears, please refer to the real configura-
tion.

NOTE This manual may present some options currently

not included in your system’s configuration. If
any difference appears, please refer to the pur-
chase contract.

1.3.1 Principle of operation

The NeuMR 1.5T system is magnetic resonance imaging system. It’s
operation is based on the principle that certain atomic nuclei present
in the human body will emit a weak relaxation signal when placed in
a strong magnetic field and excited by a radio signal at the preces-
sion frequency.
The emitted relaxation signals are analyzed by the system and a
computed image reconstruction is displayed on a Monitor.

1.4 Intended use

Your NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging system is
intended for use as a diagnostic patient imaging device that produces

NPD-MRI-1301 1-3 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

images that correspond to the distribution of protons exhibiting MRI

characteristics; depends upon the MRI parameters of proton density,
flow velocity, spin-lattice relaxation time (T1), and spin-spin relax-
ation time (T2); and displays the soft tissue structure. When read
films by a trained radiologist, MRI images Obtain useful diagnostic
information. The system is suitable for Total-body imaging .
The NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging system is used
and operated only in accordance with the safety procedures and
operating instructions given in this manual for the purposes for which
it was designed. The purposes are given below. However, nothing
stated in this manual reduces users’ and operators’responsibilities for
sound clinical judgment and best clinical procedure.
The NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging system is used
as diagnostic devices that produce transverse, sagittal, coronal and
oblique cross-sectional images of the internal structure of the human
head, body or extremities. Image appearance is determined by spa-
tial distribution and flow as well as NMR properties such as nuclear
density, spin lattice relaxation (T1), spin-spin relaxation time (T2)
and chemical shift of hydrogen-1 (protons). These images can pro-
vide the physician with useful diagnostic information.
Use and operation of this equipment is subject to the law in the juris-
diction(s) in which the equipment is being used. Both users and oper-
ators must only use and operate the equipment in such ways as do
not conflict with applicable laws or regulations which have the force
of law.
Uses of the equipment for purposes other than those intended and
expressly stated by the manufacturer, as well as incorrect use or
operation, the manufacturer (or his agent) does not assume any
responsibility for resultant non-compliance, damage or injury.

WARNING! United States Federal law restricts these devices

to sale, distribute, and use by or on the order of
a physician.

1.5 Contraindications
The NeuMR 1.5T system should not be used if any of the following
contra-indications exist or are thought to exist.
Absolute contraindications:

NPD-MRI-1301 1-4 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

The NeuMR 1.5T system should not be used if any of the following
contraindications exist:
• a cardiac pacemaker is installed in the body, except when the
pacemaker is a new MRI compatible product.
• embedded in the electronic cochlear, magnetic metal drug perfu-
sion pump, nerve stimulator and other electronic devices.
• within 3 months of pregnancy.
• there are magnetic metal foreign bodies in the orbit.
Relative contraindications:
Patients with the following conditions should carefully consider
whether to conduct MRI after weighing the advantages and disadvan-
tages on the permise of risk assessment and imaging estimation:
• patients with weak magnetic implants (such as cardiac metal
valves, vascular metal stents, blood vessel clamps, spiral coils, fil-
ters, plugs, etc.) are recommended to check again 6 to 8 weeks
after the operation.
• when there are metal shrapnel, metal artificial joints, prosthetic
limb, prosthesis and fixed steel plates, ets., the distance between
the metal implants and the scanning area (the center of the mag-
netic field) is carefully selected to ensure personel safety.
• when there are bone joints fixed, bone screws, fixed dentures,
contraceptive rings, etc., in the body, consider whether the metal
artifacts generated affect the inspection target.
• critically ill patients who can remove monitoring equipment (mag-
netic metals, electronics) for a short period of time.
• seizures, neurostimulation, claustrophobia patients.
• hyperthermia patients.
• pregnancy for 3 months or more.
• for those with metal or electronic implants in the body, it is recom-
mended to refer to the MRI safety instructions on the product
manual.
Other contraindications may be specified by local regulations. Refer
to Chapter 2 Safety for pre-screening and safety directions.

1.6 Warnings and precautions

• Do not scan patients in the contraindications group.
• Do not bring ferrous materials within the controlled access area.

NPD-MRI-1301 1-5 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• Use caution with auxiliary equipment.

(Refer to Chapter 2 Safety)

1.7 Compatibility
Equipment described in this manual should not be used in combina-
tion with other equipment or components unless such other equip-
ment or components are expressly recognized as compatible with the
NeuMR 1.5T.
Changes and/or additions to the equipment should only be carried
out by us or by third parties expressly authorized by us to do so.
Such changes and/or additions must comply with all applicable laws
and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction(s)
concerned, and with best engineering practice.
Changes and/or additions to the equipment that are carried out by
persons without the appropriate training and/or using unapproved
spare parts, may lead to the our warranty being voided. As with all
complex technical equipment, maintenance by persons not appropri-
ately qualified and/or using unapproved spare parts carries serious
risks of damage to the equipment and of personal injury.
Any accessories or auxiliary equipment used with the MRI scanner
must be tested for MRI compatibility and safety.

1.8 Compliance
The NeuMR 1.5T systems comply with relevant international and
national standards and laws. Information on compliance will be sup-
plied on request by your local representative.
The NeuMR 1.5T systems comply with relevant international and
national law and standards on EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
for this type of equipment when used as intended. Such laws and
standards define both the permissible electromagnetic emission lev-
els from equipment, and its required immunity to electromagnetic
interference from external sources.

1.9 Expected lifespan

The expected lifespan of the NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic reso-
nance imaging system is 10 years.

NPD-MRI-1301 1-6 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

1.10 Classification
Table 1-1 IEC 60601 classification

Shockproof category Class I

Shockproof level Type B and CF applied part

With CF type applied part Invivo physiology gating (including ECG,

RESP, PPG)

With B type applied part Patient table, receive coils

Protection level aginst deleterious Ordinary device, IPX0

feed liquid

Classification according to the degree The equipment cannot be used in the

of safety when using flammable presence of flammable anesthetic gases
anesthetic gas mixed with air or mixed with air or flammable anethetic
flammable anesthetic gas mixed with gases mixed with oxygen or nitrous
oxygen or nitrous oxide oxide

Classified by operating mode Continuous operation

Rated voltage and frequency of the 3~380/400/415Vac, 50/60Hz

equipment

Input power 70kVA

Whether the equipment has anti- No anti-defibrillation applied part

defibrillation applied part

Whether the equipment has a signal Yes

output or input part

Permanent or non permanent instal- Permanent installation equipment

lation equipment

1.11 Recycling passport

Product Name: MRI System

Product Model: NeuMR 1.5T

Total weight(in Kg) 7058.58

NPD-MRI-1301 1-7 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Product Name: MRI System

Producer/Manufacture Name: Neusoft Medical System Co.,Ltd

Address: No.177-1, Chuangxin Road,

Hun Nan District, Shenyang,
Liaoning, China, 110167

Recycle info Substances Location

Harzardous Lead(Pb)

To be removed

Batteries Lithium Coin Battery

Fig1-5

Fig1-8

To be removed

Special attention Air-spring

Fluids/Gases High pressure oil tank

Material content Weight in Kg

Iron(Fe) 222.3

NPD-MRI-1301 1-8 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Material content Weight in Kg

Aluminum(Al) 152.4

Copper(Cu) 1.8

Stainless steel 385.5

LHe 700

ABS 35.6

FRP 212.5

PMMA 4.4

All other material 5403.7

types

Locations as mentioned in the NeuMR 1.5T MRI Recy-

cling Passport (Pictures information)

Stalinite
Silica gel
PCBA
AL
FRP
AL
ABS+PC
Stainless steel
Silica gel
ABS+PC
Silica gel
Cu
EPDM

Fig. 1-2 Cover

NPD-MRI-1301 1-9 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Al
Fe
Pb
Al
Cu

Stainless
stell

Fig. 1-3 Magnet (without cover)

ABS
PCB

Fig. 1-4 Intercom

NPD-MRI-1301 1-10 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

ABS

Fig. 1-5 Invivo ECG gating

ABS

Fig. 1-6 Invivo RESP and PPG

NPD-MRI-1301 1-11 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Glass fiber
reinforced
epoxy
condensate
(containing
copper,
silicon,
micro powder
etc.)

NBR

Stainless steel

Fig. 1-7 Gradient coil

Epoxy glass
fiber
laminate

ABS+
PC

Fig. 1-8 Gradient coil

NPD-MRI-1301 1-12 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

PVC
Si
Fe
Cu
Mn
Mg
Cr
Ni C
Sn Si
Ti S
P
Al Mn

ABS((C8H8.C4H6.C3H3N)x)

Fig. 1-9 Console

Steel

Thermoplastic

Cu Duroplastic

Cast iron

Fig. 1-10 LCC

NPD-MRI-1301 1-13 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

LCD

Fig. 1-11 LCC

Steels
high-alloyed

Thermoplastic

Fig. 1-12 Hose

NPD-MRI-1301 1-14 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Foam
PC

FRP FRP

PC PC/ABS

FRP

Fig. 1-13 Patient table

Fe
Al
Cu
PCB

Fig. 1-14 GA

NPD-MRI-1301 1-15 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

PE

Fig. 1-15 T61

PMMA

Fig. 1-16 F220 phantom

NPD-MRI-1301 1-16 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fe
Cu
PVC

Fig. 1-17 Compressor

Fe

Fe,Al, PCB

Fe, Al
Cu, PCB

Fe, Al, Cu
PCB, PVC

Fig. 1-18 System cabinet

NPD-MRI-1301 1-17 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fe
Cu
PVC

Fig. 1-19 Isolation transformer

Cu
Stainless stee

Fig. 1-20 Filter plate

NPD-MRI-1301 1-18 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Cu
PMMA

Fig. 1-21 Cable

Mechanical
enclosure
Electronic
components

Screw

PCB

Fig. 1-22 RXU

NPD-MRI-1301 1-19 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

RF_POWER LC_DYN CAN_IO BC_DYN

PCBA PCBA PCBA PCBA

Fig. 1-23 RFCU

FRP
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-24 QBC

NPD-MRI-1301 1-20 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Al
Cu
PCBA

Fig. 1-25 TCU

Al
Cu
PCBA

Fig. 1-26 RCU

NPD-MRI-1301 1-21 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

PC
Cu
PCBA

Fig. 1-27 AIM NV

PC, PCBA, Cu

Fig. 1-28 AIM Spine

NPD-MRI-1301 1-22 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

PC
PE
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-29 AIM Torso

PC
PE
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-30 AIM GP Flex M

NPD-MRI-1301 1-23 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

PE
PC
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-31 AIM GP Flex S

PE
PC
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-32 AIM Loop Flex

NPD-MRI-1301 1-24 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

PC
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-33 Head Coil

PC
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-34 Knee Coil

NPD-MRI-1301 1-25 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

PC
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-35 Shoulder Coil

PC
PE
PCBA
Cu

Fig. 1-36 Breast Coil

NPD-MRI-1301 1-26 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 1-37 WEEE label

Dispose of in accordance with your country’s requirements. Please
contact your distributor or your municipal waste collection facility for
information on proper disposal.

1.12 Training
Operators of the NeuMR 1.5T must have received adequate training
on its safe and effective use before attempting to operate the equip-
ment described. Training requirements for this type of device will
vary from country to country. It is for the users to make sure that the
operators receive adequate training in accordance with local laws or
regulations that have the force of law.
If you require further information about training in the use of this
equipment, please contact your local representative.

NPD-MRI-1301 1-27 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NPD-MRI-1301 1-28 Introduction

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 2 Safety

This chapter provides important safety information for your NeuMR

1.5T MRI Imaging System. Read carefully this section, and observe
all cautions and warnings for the safe and efficient operation of your
MRI system.
Your MRI system integrates several advanced technologies to pro-
duce a powerful medical diagnostic tool. As the personnel designed,
developed, and manufactured your MRI equipment, the safe usage of
these technologies was a primary concern. Your MRI equipment con-
forms to safety regulations established by the industry and the U.S.
government regulatory organizations in effect at the time of its man-
ufacture.
The safety of the product complies with the requirement stipulated in
IEC 60601 Ed3.1:2012, EN 60601-1:2006/A1:2013, EN 60601-1-
2:2015, EN 60601-2-33:2010/A2:2015, EN 60601-1-6:2010, EN ISO
14971:2012, EN ISO 15223-1:2016, EN 60825-1: 2014, EN 62366:
2008/A1:2015, EN 62304:2006/A1:2015, and its electromagnetic
compatibility complies with the requirement stipulated in IEC 60601-
1-2 Ed4.0:2014.

2.1 Equipment safety

Current information indicates that, when used properly, MRI technol-
ogy produces no known health hazards for operators who observe the
safety procedures and cautions, nor does it pose any hazard for most
patients. However, the misuse or abuse of the MRI equipment can
result in serious or fatal injury. For the safe and efficient use of your
MRI equipment, you must:
• Understand the potential hazards associated with the equipment.
• Observe proper operating and maintenance procedures for the
equipment.
• Understand and observe any and all local regulations that relate to
the operation of the MRI equipment and the safety of MRI person-
nel and patients.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-1 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

During the maintenance and the usage, pay attention to the following
safety symbols.
Table 2-1 Safety symbol
Symbol Description

Three-phase alternating current

Protective earth (ground)

Dangerous Voltage

“ON” for part of equipment

“OFF” for part of equipment

“ON” (power)

“OFF” (power)

Stand-by

Type B applied part

NPD-MRI-1301 2-2 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 2-1 Safety symbol

Symbol Description

Defibrillation-proof Type CF
applied part

Class II equipment

Emergency stop

Sitting prohibited

Warning: crushing of hands

Warning: high magnet

Warning: high temperature

General warning sign

Date of manufacture

NPD-MRI-1301 2-3 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 2-1 Safety symbol

Symbol Description

Manufacturer

Serial number

Operating instructions

Refer to instruction manual/

booklet

General mandatory action sign

2.2 EMC performance

EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) depicts the performance by
which a device inhibits electromagnetic interference from other
devices, meantime the device itself does not produce the similar elec-
tromagnetic interference with other devices.
In its nature, MRI system may create electromagnetic interference
with other devices through air or connecting cables. The design of the
product complies fully with the standard of EMC.

WARNING! Users shall use the peripheral devices (coils and

cables, for example) specified for the connection
with the equipment. Failure to follow this
instruction may cause injury to patients or lower
EMC performance of the equipment.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-4 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Electrical fast transients and bursts will cause

strip-shaped artifacts in images, which cannot
be used to diagnose.

WARNING! EQUIPMENT and SYSTEMS specified for use only

in a shield location shall be labeled with a warn-
ing that they should be used only in the specified
type of shield location.
CAUTION! Be sure to turn all screws tightly while maintain-
ing the equipment. The loose screw will lower E
MC performance of system.
CAUTION! The equipment is very liable to create electro-
magnetic interference because it produces reso-
nance by a strong magnetic field. The magnet of
the system must be placed in the specially
shielded room to keep the magnet stability.
CAUTION! The strong magnetic field in MRI system will
interact with large moving metal objects in its
surroundings. Once the field is interfered with,
the image quality will be influenced direct, there-
fore, the minimum distance between the exter-
nal interference source and the magnet center
must be taken into full consideration to keep the
field stability. In general, there must not exist
large moving metal objects such as elevators and
cars within the definite distance from the magnet
center.
CAUTION! Ferromagnetic substances in the vicinity of a
magnet field will influence the homogeneity of
the latter; therefore, mass and weight of ferro-
magnetic substances (reinforcing bars in build-
ings, metal drains, heat supply pipes included)
within the distance of 2.5M (especially on both
sides within 2M in the magnetic axis and the
ground and the ceiling within 1250 millimeters
from the magnetic center axis (Z axis) ) from the
magnet center should be evaluated for their
influence.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-5 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

CAUTION! The installation site should be as far as possible

from the vibration source such as parking lots,
highways, metros, trains, pumps, large motors
and so on, lest magnet should be vibrated.
CAUTION! HV lines, transformers, large generators or
motors in the vicinity of MRI system should be
evaluated for their influence.
CAUTION! Be sure not to make any change on the equip-
ment. The change made on the equipment by
users alone will lower its EMC performance. Such
change includes the change of cables (length,
materials, wiring, and so on), the change of sys-
tem installation/layout, the change of methods
or parts for fixing system.
CAUTION! The electrostatic discharge precautionary proce-
dures must be carried out while the service engi-
neers maintain the equipment, such as wearing
the antistatic clothes or using antistatic wrist
strap.
CAUTION! The pins of connectors identified with the elec-
trostatic discharge warning symbol should not
be touched and that connections should not be
made to these connectors unless electrostatic
discharge precautionary procedures are used.

2.2.1 Solutions of the problem involved in EMC

• Be sure to operate the system according to the instruction
described in Pre-installation manual to create the basic environ-
ment where it won’t be influenced by electromagnetic interfer-
ence.
• For reducing electromagnetic interference, move other devices as
far as possible from the system.
• For reducing electromagnetic interference, adjust the position/
angle of this equipment in relation to other devices.
• For reducing electromagnetic interference, change the route/con-
nection position of the power lines or signal cables of other
devices.
• For reducing electromagnetic interference, change power supply of
other devices.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-6 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2.3 Your role in MRI safety

You play a vital role in MRI safety. The greatest risk of injury and
damage results from:
• Misuse or abuse of the MRI equipment.
• Failure to comply with the recommended safety procedures.
• Lack of proper inspection and maintenance of the MRI equipment.
You can reduce the chance of accidents by:
• Scheduling routine inspections.
• Co-operating with the service engineer to install safety improve-
ments.
• Securing the MRI suite area from entry by unauthorized persons.
• Operating the MRI equipment only with authorized modifications
or additions.
It is recommended that the place using the MRI equipment be
equipped with at least one MRI medical physicists as needed to revise
and maintain MRI safety management regulations, making it suitable
for site and subject inspection requirements, while ensuring MRI
safety management practices are enforced strictly.

2.4 Who should know MRI safety

Non-MRI personal entering the magnet must undergo MRI safety
screening and only MRI operators are qualified to perform screening.
MRI operators muse also self-check before entering the magnet
room.
• Items with MRI safety indicators can be used in the magnet room.
• Items with MRI unsafe indicators are usually prohibited from
entering the magnet room.
• Items with a conditional safety indicators can be used in the mag-
net room if certain conditions are met.
In short, everyone who will enter the MRI suite area for any reason
will need to know the basic safety measures. This includes, but may
not be limited to:
• All in-house personnel that have a reason to enter the MRI suite
area:
- MRI operators and medical personnel
- In-house security personnel

NPD-MRI-1301 2-7 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Maintenance and janitorial personnel

• The patients and people who accompany them.
• Public safety forces in surrounding communities that may respond
to the MRI suite for an emergency:
- Local county, city or provincial law enforcement departments
- Fire departments
• Other community members who may visit the site in the course of
their business:
- Employees of utility companies
- Various inspectors on official business
In some special cases (as the physician thinks it is necessary), even if
the device is not safe, it may be carried into the magnet room. At this
point, MRI personnel who is very familiar with the equipment should
be present and try to keep the device outside the 5 gauss line (refer
to Chapter 2.6.2 Gauss lines).

2.4.1 MRI safety issues for in-house personnel

For in-house personnel, the following table provides a partial list of
items that can become projectiles if brought into the magnetic field.
Personnel should be thoroughly briefed about the potential risk
involved and warned not to bring any ferromagnetic items into the
magnetic field.
Table 2-2
MRI operators Maintenance and janito- In-house secu-
and medical per- rial personnel rity personnel
sonnel

scissors dustpans guns

scalpels buckets knives

syringes buffers handcuffs

oxygen cylinders vacuum cleaners clipboards

gurneys tools flashlights

clipboards tool kits

The new staff of the hospital should have a potentially dangerous

report. In addition, the safety owner should provide a safety briefing
on a regular basis to remind the staff of the potential danger of mag-
netic resonance.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-8 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2.4.2 MRI safety issues for patients

Brief the patient in advance to reduce tension and anxiety (see Chap-
ter 2.11.1 Informing the patient).
Screen the patient for possible contraindications, and see Chapter
2.8.3 Patient screening.
Ensure that the patient does not take any ferromagnetic objects, or
objects that may be damaged by the magnetic field into the magnetic
room.

2.4.3 MRI safety issues for public safety forces

Public safety forces in surrounding communities that may respond to
the MRI suite for an emergency must also know the potential haz-
ards. Inform personnel in these organizations of the potential haz-
ards of the MRI equipment. A person from the MRI site should discuss
the possible hazards with these people and provide them with hand-
outs that will reinforce the information discussed at the meetings.
For public safety forces, the following table provides a partial list of
objects that can become projectiles if brought into the magnetic field:
Table 2-3
Law enforcement personnel Fire department personnel

guns axe

knives hose couplings

handcuffs nozzles

clipboards pike poles

flashlights fire extinguishers

Breathing apparatus

2.4.4 MRI safety issues for other visitors

Inform the visitors of the potential hazards of the MRI equipment. If
the visitor needs to enter the magnet room, observe the same pre-
cautions as with patients.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-9 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2.5 Electrical safety

WARNING! There exist circuits and devices of large power in

MRI system, therefore persons who do not
undergo special training must not open the cas-
ing of the equipment or maintain it to avoid the
possible personal injury.

WARNING! If there were damage on the casing of the

equipment, please don't operate the MRI
system.

WARNING! To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment

must only be connected to a supply mains with
protective earth.

WARNING! You must not connect electrical equipment to

MSO, it will effectively lead to creating a ME
SYSTEM, and can result in a reduced level of
safety.
CAUTION! Be sure to cut off power supply of the equipment
before cleaning magnet room. Do not use organic
solvents or any combustible liquid for cleaning
equipment surface or floor. Make sure not to let
cleaning agent or water enter the inside of
equipment. Should this situation happen, do not
energize MRI system.
CAUTION! Power capacity must not be less than 70kVA for
the normal function of system. Be sure not to
start MRI system if power is short of the require-
ment, and especially, not to offer power supply
to MRI system by dynamo whose performance is
unsteady, otherwise computers or other devices
may be burned.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-10 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

CAUTION! Before starting the equipment, you must first

check that the external wiring and connections
of the various components are correct.
CAUTION! Any RF coils and gating subassemblies were not
allowed to take out the scan room.

2.6 Magnet safety

Although not detectable by the human senses, a magnetic field can
be dangerous to equipment and people.
For the safety of patients and personnel, a controlled access area
should exist. Control the access area to a distance of
4.5m*2.5m*2.5m. The magnetic fringe field strength outside this
area should not exceed five gauss (0.5 mT; see Chapter 2.6.2 Gauss
lines). Use warning signs, markings, and barriers to prevent the entry
of ferromagnetic objects in the controlled access area and to limit the
access of individuals with medical implants.

WARNING! Personnel should always consider a magnet to

be at field and use established safety procedures
to prevent accidents.

NOTE Keep a small magnet outside of the controlled

access area to check anyone entering the area
for ferromagnetic objects.

NOTE It is the responsibility of the user to follow local

statutory requirements with respect to access to
the controlled area.

2.6.1 Posting warning signs

Display warning signs on the door of the scanner room, see Fig 2-1,
which provide the following warnings:

NPD-MRI-1301 2-11 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 2-1 Warning Label

Table 2-4 MR safety signs
Symbol Description

Warning: Magnetic field

NPD-MRI-1301 2-12 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 2-4 MR safety signs

Symbol Description

Warning: Non-ionizing radiation

No access for people with active

implanted cardiac devices

No access for people with metallic

implants

No burning

No access with ferromagnetic contain-

ers

No access with ferromagnetic tools

No access with ferromagnetic carts

No access with credit cards

No metallic articles or watches

NPD-MRI-1301 2-13 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 2-4 MR safety signs

Symbol Description

Refer to instruction manual/booklet

NOTE On ME EQUIPMENT “Follow
instructions for use“

Wear ear protection

Fig. 2-2 Electrostatic sensitive devices

Illustration: To indicate packages containing electrostatic sensitive
devices, or to identify a device or connector that has not been tested
for immunity to electrostatic discharge.

2.6.2 Gauss lines

The gauss lines define the strength of the magnetic field at specific
locations. Magnetic fringe fields are restricted, and therefore, the
hazardous zone is limited. The following illustration (Fig 2-3) shows
the typical location for the magnet used with your MRI system. Notice
that, for example, structural steel or other ferromagnetic material in
the surrounding area will modify the shape and extent of the gauss
lines.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-14 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 2-3 The five gauss line

2.6.3 Projectiles
Personnel working on or near a magnetic field must use nonmagnetic
tools as the magnet attracts objects with magnetically active metal.
The following table lists common magnetic and non-magnetic metals.
Table 2-5
Magnetic materials Non-magnetic materi-
als

Cobalt alloys Aluminium Copper

Iron Beryllium Gold (14k)

Nickel alloys Brass Stainless steel AISI

316L

Steel (except stainless Bronze Sterling silver

steel)

NPD-MRI-1301 2-15 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Remove all magnetic objects from patients and

personnel before entering the magnet room.

WARNING! Do not use ferrous tools, such as wrenches and

scalpels, within the 5 gauss line. The strong
magnetic field may cause a loose tool to become
airborne. The object can strike a patient and/or
personnel, or damage the magnet. Larger mag-
netic objects, such as tool kits and gas cylinders,
can be drawn to the magnet and may trap a per-
son against the magnet.

WARNING! Do not pull large magnetic objects, such as gas

cylinder, from a magnet at field. The object may
change its magnetic polarity and re-align itself
on the magnet. This movement can cause seri-
ous or fatal injury.

WARNING! Some stainless steels may contain ferromag-

netic material. Use a small magnet to check any
stainless steel instrument or tools before bring-
ing them near the magnet. If the stainless steel
is magnetic, do not bring it into the magnetic
field.

WARNING! If you use equipment that includes batteries

(such as gating devices) make sure that the bat-
teries do not contain ferromagnetic materials.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-16 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2.7 Items affected by magnetic fields

The magnetic field can seriously damage or impair the operation of
equipment or personal items.

WARNING! The scan room door must be kept tightly closed

while scanning. Failure to do so will allow exter-
nal electromagnetic interference into the scan
room, which could degrade image quality. Also,
failure to keep the door tightly closed may result
in electromagnetic signals from the MRI scanner
interfering with or preventing the proper opera-
tion of other, nearby, medical and non-medical
equipment.

WARNING! The danger situations caused by interaction

between magnetic fields and ferromagnetic
material are following: ferromagnetic aneurysm
clips or ferromagnetic fragments move in the
patient body will lead injuries of surrounding tis-
sues; unfixed ferromagnetic materials inhaled
into the magnetic will lead patient injuries; the
heavy ferromagnet inhaled on the surface of
magnet lead the patient; the magnetic gradient
of magnet is obviously, even at the edge of the
magnet where the magnet density is low is also
dangerous for ferromagnetic inhaled.
CAUTION! Do not use equipment with slow-moving electron
beams, such as oscilloscopes, within the mag-
netic field. The magnetic field distorts the dis-
plays. The magnetic field can damage cameras
and analog watches, and erase data on credit
and bank cards.
CAUTION! Anyone involved in MRI scan (including patients,
accompanying members and MRI operators)
must remove all metal accessories such as mag-
netic cards, ID cards, watches, keys, coins, hair
clips, belt buckles, glasses, mobile phones, and
cameras. And similiar electronic devices, jewel-
lery worn after the perforation of the removable

NPD-MRI-1301 2-17 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

body surface, metal drug-conductive sheets, cos-

metics containing metal particles, and clothes
with metal ornaments.
CAUTION! For patients with reduced mobility, MRI safety
walkers, MRI safety wheelchairs or MRI safe
shoulder carriers are recommended. Infusion
sets, sphygmomanometers, and life monitors
should be MRI safe or conditionally safe.

2.7.1 MRI equipment safety symbol

All metal or metal-containing items that are intended to be brought
into the scanning room must be tested and pasted with the appropri-
ate safety indicator:
• Ferromagnetic metal objects paste red round MRI unsafe sign, see
Fig 2-4a.
• Safe objects under certain conditions paste yellow triangle condi-
tional safety sign, see Fig 2-4b.
• Non-metallic objects paste green square MRI safety sign, see
Fig 2-4c.

a b c

Fig. 2-4 MRI safety indicator sign

Screening tool
In the MRI environment, is not recommended to use traditional
detectors and check gates based on the same principle. The main
reason lies in the following:
1. The devices are sensitive and easy to change;
2. The detection effect is affected by the operator’s use;
3. Devices with low sensitivity cannot detect potentially dangerous
ferromagnetic metal fragments with a maximum diameter of 2 to
3 mm in the eyelids, spine or heart, and devices with excessive
sensitivity may cause frequent false alarms and interfere with nor-
mal operation;
NPD-MRI-1301 2-18 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4. Cannot discriminate whether metal objects, implants or foreign

bodies in vitro are ferromagnetic.
At present, a ferromagnetic object detection system with simple
operation and high sensitivity can distinguish and detect ferromag-
netic and non-ferromagnetic materials, and can be used as an auxil-
iary tool.

2.7.2 Third party equipment

To ensure the specified performance characteristics of your scanner,
auxiliary equipment and accessories must be MRI compatible. Most
vendors understand that the MRI compatibility includes the use of
non-ferromagnetic material. However, not all vendors consider the
full implications of labeling their devices as MRI compatible. To be
truly compatible, vendors must also consider four additional areas:
• How does the equipment interact with the scanner?
• How does the scanner interact with the equipment?
• How does the equipment affect the scanner’s performance specifi-
cations?
• Are there any potential safety hazards?
MRI-compatible, carefully evaluate auxiliary equipment and its inter-
action with your MRI scanner before purchasing auxiliary equipment
from a third-party vendor.
All auxiliary equipment and accessories used in the NeuMR1.5T sys-
tem must be marked for MRI safety and MRI conditional safety.

WARNING! Auxiliary equipment, such as physiological moni-

toring, gating equipment, and RF coils, which
have not been specifically tested and approved
for use with this MRI device may get malfunction
in the magnetic field or may result in burns or
other injuries to the patient.

WARNING! Use caution even with MRI-compatible equip-

ment, as it too can cause injury if all instructions
are not properly followed. In particular, when
using ancillary equipment marked as MRI condi-
tions, it can only be used in conjunction with the

NPD-MRI-1301 2-19 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

system if it meets the conditions in the manufac-

turer's instructions for use.

WARNING! Do not install or run third-party executables

(computer programs or program components,
including device drivers, and so on.) on your
workstation. Incompatible software can affect
the operation of the MRI magnet or cause the
system to be unusable.
CAUTION! NeuMR 1.5T MRI system can’t be compatible
with the other auxiliary equipment except MRI-
compatible equipment.
CAUTION! Any auxiliary or external equipment of MRI sys-
tem must be tested for MRI EMC and safety
before using.
CAUTION! Installing third-party software on your worksta-
tion may also result in changes to the original
software.
We offer a number of devices and accessories, validated at the sys-
tem level, to be compatible with the MRI system and not to degrade
the performance characteristics of the system. These devices and
accessories include RF coils, gating hardware, and image transfers
using standard networking options.
The compatibility of the tools and accessories used by the MRI ope-
artor as a function of the value of the static magnetic field my be
changed.

2.7.3 Implants and prostheses

Static magnetic fields can alter the operation of implants that are
operated electrically (pacemakers and neurostimulators) or mechani-
cally (infusion pumps).

WARNING! Patients and personnel with electrically acti-

vated implants, such as pacemakers and neuro-
stimulators, must remain outside the 5 gauss
line.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-20 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Individuals with implanted magnetic objects in

the brain, such as intracranial aneurysm or sur-
gical clips, must not approach the magnet; these
objects may become dislodged and cause seri-
ous injury.

WARNING! Patients with implanted metal objects located

elsewhere in the body should be reviewed by a
physician before entering the magnetic field.

2.7.4 Make-up, tattoos, shrapnel, and foreign bodies

Facial cosmetics, especially eye make-up, may contain ingredients
sensitive to RF and magnetic fields. Several incidents of eye irritation
(during scanning) due to make-up have been reported. Patients
should remove eye make-up before undergoing a scan.
Individuals may have magnetically active metal fragments embedded
in their skin or eyes. Body tattoos and permanent eyeliner can con-
tain small amounts of ferrous material. These materials can cause
severe irritation when exposed to the magnetic field.
Carefully screen patients who may be wearing a nitroglycerin trans-
dermal delivery system (nitro mattress). Some types of nitro mat-
tresses may contain metallic components that are susceptible to
localized heating during an MRI scan and could cause patient burns.
If a patient is wearing a nitro mattress, the patient’s physician should
be consulted. Inform the physician that scanning while the patient is
wearing the nitro mattress may cause patient burns. Consult with the
physician for instructions on how to proceed. If the patient is wearing
the above materials or wet clothes, the operator should seriously
consider and warn of the risk of burns.

2.8 Operating safely

When operating the MRI equipment, the operator must be alert for
the abnormal conditions:
• louder-than-normal noises
• sparks

NPD-MRI-1301 2-21 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• components overheating
• smoke or odors coming from the electronic equipment
• liquid leaks
If the equipment displays any of the above conditions, perform an
emergency shutdown and report the problem to your local service
office. Do not attempt to troubleshoot the problem. Only authorized
service personnel may work on the equipment.

WARNING! Do not operate equipment with shrouds, panels,

covers, or doors opened or removed from any of
the components. If you operate MRI equipment
with protective panels opened or removed, there
is the risk of electric shock that may result in
serious or fatal injury. If you observe/suspect
any of the conditioned listed above, do not use
the scanner.

2.8.1 Patient safety

The MRI technology in use today produces no known hazards to the
majority of patients undergoing scans. However, certain patients may
experience problems that either prevent or restrict the use of MRI
scans. Some of these patients can be scanned (with caution), see
Chapter 1.5 Contraindications.

2.8.2 Personnel safety

The MRI technology in use today produces no known risks to the
majority of medical personnel (or anyone else visiting the site for
whatever reason). However, the same reasons that prohibit certain
patient’s entry to the restricted access zone also prohibit entry by
medical personnel with a similar condition.
Current research information does not indicate that MRI imaging is
either safe or unsafe for a developing fetus. Organogenesis, or the
development of the fetal organs, occurs in the first trimester. During
this critical period of prenatal development, the risk to the fetus
should be minimized. Technologist must consider the benefits of MRI
scanning versus the potential risks to patients within this group.
Pregnant medical personnel should take precautions when entering
the magnet room. It is recommended that pregnant medical person-
nel remain outside of the magnet room during scanning. Although no

NPD-MRI-1301 2-22 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

research data exist indicating that a strong magnetic or gradient field

affects prenatal development, any risk to the fetus from prolonged
exposure should be avoided.
The risk factors associated with the exposure levels for the MRI oper-
ator are following:

NOTE In some countries legislation may exist covering

occupational limits for exposure to static mag-
netic fields.

NOTE The MRI operator should be informed and trained

sufficiently so that they can perform all their
tasks safetly in a way that minizes their expo-
sure to EMF emitted by the MRI equipment.

NOTE There is a possible that peripheral nerve stimula-

tion can be induced in the patient and MRI opera-
tor when exposed to the gradients in the first
level controlled operating mode.

NOTE Exposure to RF radiation can be minimized by

keeping sufficient distance away from the trans-
mit RF coil or by reducing time of exposure dur-
ing scanning.

NOTE The possible physiological effect of exposure to

the gradient output is peripheral nerve stimula-
tion for the person exposed. Especially MRI oper-
ator performing interventional MRI exami-
nations, shall be informed and trained that,
although peripheral nerve stimulation is not
expected, the safety of patients shall not be com-
promised during interventional procedures due
to peripheral nerve stimulation. Exposure to gra-
dient output can be minimized by keeping suffi-
cient distance away from the gradient coils
during scanning.

NOTE Exposure to the static magnetic field can be min-

imized by staying away from the magnetic (not
just during scanning but all the time) and by
avoiding rapid movements of the head while in
the static magnetic field.

It is generally accepted that no published evidence supporting the

occurrence of the cumulative and/or long-term effects after exposure
to EMF emitted by the MRI equipment exists.
NPD-MRI-1301 2-23 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2.8.3 Patient screening

At least one MRI operator must screen the patient for possible con-
traindications that could affect MRI scan.
If the patient is at risk, but not in the contraindication group, the
patient’s physician must weigh the pros and cons of the MRI scan and
inform the patient of the risk. It is especially important for patients
who may be at risk due to occupation, past medical history, current
physical condition, or the physical environment of the MR equipment.
If a decision to proceed with the scan is made, the patient should be
closely monitored for any unexpected side effects.
The MRI operator must use caution when performing a scan on
patients with the following items:
• metallic implants and prostheses
• metallic foreign bodies embedded in the skin
• eye make-up, including permanently tattooed eyeliner
• tattoos
• body piercing
• sensitive hearing
• life support and/or monitoring
• compromised thermoregulatory systems
• prosthetic heart valves
• surgical clips
• pregnant women
• neonates and infants
MRI operators are advised to prepare a MRI safety screening ques-
tionnaire for screening as a screening tool. Allow conscious patients
to fill out the MRI safety screening questionnaire before entering the
magnet room; patients with incapacity or coma can be filled out by
their guardian or the competent physician who knows the medical
history and operation. If necessary, screeners will also reconfirm the
questions in the questionnaire with the questionnaire participants.
The questionnaire holder and the MRI staff responsible for screening
are required to sign the questionnaire form. Screening questionnaires
should be filed in a timely manner.

2.8.3.1 Screening for comatose patients

Patients who are clinically considered to be in need of MRI examina-
tion but are unconscious or unresponsive and do not provide reliable
NPD-MRI-1301 2-24 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

information about surgery, trauma, or metallic foreign bodies, and

who do not have access to relevant information by others should be
aware of the following issues.
1. If conditions permit, it is recommended to wait for the patient to
be awake to confirm the metal foreign body condition before per-
forming MRI examination; if not, the MRI staff is recommended to
check the body. Scarred or deformed areas can be anatomically
suggestive that surgery has been performed here, and X-ray films
can be taken to further confirm the implant.
2. Close observation of unconscious patients in MRI scanners.
3. Strictly control the scanning time.

2.8.3.2 Screening for pregnant patients

There is currently insufficient evidence to clarify the impact of MRI on
women in early pregnancy (12 weeks prior to the important forma-
tion of fetal systemic organs). Based on ethical requirements, some
countries have not approved MRI for early pregnancy. The cautious
view is that women should avoid MRI at their discretion in early preg-
nancy. Non-early pregnancy patients can be examined on MRI equip-
ment up to 1.5T (inclusive).

2.8.3.3 Screening for child patients

Children (especially older children or adolescents) may be concealed
during screening and will be asked separately in the presence and
absence of their family members to maximize exposure to all poten-
tial risks. It is recommended to replace the special inspection suits
before entering the magnet to ensure that they do not bring items
such as ferromagnetic metal toys. Persons accompanying children
into the magnet room should also be screened for safety according to
the appropriate procedures.

2.8.4 Patient handling

Handling the patient during a scan includes several operations, such
as movement of the patient support and alignment using laser light,
which can cause injury to the patient.

NOTE Insulating materials (insulation mattresses or

other insulating materials) are placed between
the patient and the conductive material to pre-
vent direct contact between the wires and the
patient's skin, which can effectively reduce the
probability of burns. If the conductive material

NPD-MRI-1301 2-25 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

has to be in direct contact with the patient's skin,

an ice pack can be used for local cold application.

NOTE If the imaging area covers large areas or dark

tattoos (including eye lines), in order to reduce
heat accumulation, it is recommended to apply
an ice pack to cool down during the MRI scan.
Also inform the patient that an MRI scan may
blur the tattoo pattern within 48 hours.

NOTE For patients who are unconscious or unrespon-

sive, all conductive materials connected to them
should be cooled or iced.

NOTE Some drug patches contain metal. To avoid the

risk of overheating the patch during MRI scan-
ning, the ice pack can usually be placed on a
metal patch for cold application. However, this
sometimes affects the rate of drug delivery and
the effect of absorption, and the radiologist
should communicate with the patient's clinician
in a timely manner.

NOTE If the metal stud or suture is located inside or

near the RF radiation area, the patient should be
reminded to pay special attention to whether the
area of the skin nail or suture distribution is
warm or even burning. If this is the case, report
it immediately. Alternatively, an ice pack can be
placed on the area where the skin nails or
sutures are distributed for cold application.

NOTE Whenever possible, use a local transmit-receiv-

ing coil to keep the conductive material away
from the RF radiation area.

NOTE MRI-related interventional procedures (such as

MRI-guided focused ultrasound, MRI-guided
biopsy, and so on.) are increasing. In this pro-
cess, patients may need to stay in the MRI envi-
ronment for a long time and undergo repeated
scans. The risk of burns is higher and should be
taken seriously. In addition, when checking the
last patient before the shift or before leaving
work, it is necessary to check repeatedly and
resolutely avoid forgetting the patient in the
scanning escutcheon.
NPD-MRI-1301 2-26 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NOTE When moving the patient with the patient table,

use a band to ensure that the patient does not
fall when moving.

NOTE To minimize the risk of falling, please help the

patient go to the patient table.

WARNING! Before the MRI examination, all unnecessary

conductive materials outside the patient's body
should be removed. It is not enough to simply
unplug the power cord or not connect.

WARNING! Before the patient enters the magnet room,

check for and remove all ferromagnetic objects.
Under the effects of a strong magnetic field, fer-
romagnetic objects can become dangerous pro-
jectiles.

WARNING! Before moving the patient table, visually check

that there is no equipment, cabling, furniture,
and so on. on its path. Serious damage can occur
if the patient support collides with or runs over
other objects.

WARNING! Before descending the patient table, check that

there are no cables or parts of the patient's body
or other objects under the table.

WARNING! Keep all medical attachments to the patient,

such as monitoring cables, away from the edge
of the patient support. As the patient support
moves, these attachments can become entan-
gled with other equipment or stationary parts,

NPD-MRI-1301 2-27 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

or be caught between the patient table and the

magnet, possibly resulting in injury.

WARNING! When positioning the patient on the patient sup-

port, make sure that his hands or other body
parts do not get caught between the patient
support and the magnet. Properly position the
patient on the patient support. Do not allow any
part of the patient’s body to extend over the side
of the patient support during its movement.

WARNING! Before using the RF coils, visually check them to

ensure that they are undamaged. Keep cables
from forming loops and coming into contact with
the patient. Contact may result in burns to the
patient.

WARNING! Care should be taken to avoid direct contact

between the patient's skin and the skin (for
example, the hand should not touch the hips, the
arms should not cross, the legs should not cross,
and so on.), otherwise it may cause burns.

WARNING! Conductive objects placed in RF field may create

a source of RF current. A RF current coupled to a
patient can result in burns to the patient at the
point of contact.

2.8.5 Laser warning labels

Laser positioning light systems can only be used under the supervi-
sion of trained operators as they are familiar with the dangers of
laser lights.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-28 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

The following laser radiation sign (see Fig 2-5) is pasted on magnet
cover where near the laser localizer.

Fig. 2-5 Laser safety symbols.

According to the classification in IEC 60825.1-2014, this laser is in
class 1M. The laser power is °‹0.39mW, wavelength is 645~660nm.
The laser projector contains no user-serviceable components inside.
Do not attempt to open the casing, as this could cause an eye injury.
Refer all servicing to our engineer only.

WARNING! The MRI operator uses lasers to position the

patient for the scan. Laser light can be harmful
to a person’s eyesight. Inform the patient about
the hazard and instruct the patient to close his
eyes while you use the laser light. Failure to
comply could result in eye injury.

WARNING! The laser must not be switched on without a

purpose, and unnecessary exposure must be
avoided.

WARNING! Using adjustments or procedures other than

those specified here may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-29 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Advise your patient not to stare directly into the

laser light, it will cause an eye injury.

WARNING! For patients who are unable to respond (infants,

anesthesia patients), adequate protection
should be provided to avoid direct exposure of
the laser to the eyes.

2.9 Patient monitoring

During the scan, the MRI operator must monitor the patient for possi-
ble signs of trouble, such as:
• vomiting
• aspiration
• claustrophobia or anxiety attacks
• vertigo
• metal fishy smell in mouth
Ensure continuous patient monitoring and MRI operators can provide
immediate assistance in an emergency. Although the patient should
not speak during the scan, the MRI operator can speak to the patient.
Pay special attention to monitoring the following patients:
• pregnant woman
• neonates, infants and children
• patients who are unable to respond due to medication or other
reasons, or who are unable to maintain reliable communication
(e.g., coma or unconscious, infants, children, seniors).
If the patient is in an unstable medical condition, there should be a
trained medical person in the scan room for immediate care. For
example, monitor the following patients:
• patients with a risk of heart attack, including patients with
arrhythmia
• patients who may have seizures or have a claustrophobia response
• patients with metallic implants

NPD-MRI-1301 2-30 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

To awake the patient, the patient should be removed from the mag-
net and placed outside the 5 gauss line. Use the NeuMR 1.5T system
patient table or a wheelchair made of non-magnetic material, or a
stretcher to transport the patient.

NOTE The magnetic field interferes with the operation

of resuscitation equipment within the ten gauss
line. Therefore, the equipment must stay outside
the ten gauss line.

NOTE Procedures should be established to handle any

emergencies that require that a patient be
removed from the scanner for medical attention.
Ensure that all personnel are aware of these pro-
cedures and emergency medical equipment that
can and cannot be brought within the magnetic
field.

WARNING! The risk, for example, of RF heating may

increase especially with weak patients, if the
patients are not properly monitored during scan-
ning.

2.9.1 Children’s sedation and monitoring

Sedatives are often required because it is difficult for children to
remain stationary during the scan. Note the following issues when
implementing sedation:
1. Fully grasp the medical history and examination requirements of
each patient;
2. Provide appropriate fasting guidance for patients of different ages;
3. Monitor with appropriate observation methods (such as window
visits, camera recordings, and so on.);
4. Ensure that first aid equipment (such as oxygen and oxygen inha-
lation devices) is in good condition;
5. Record important information such as body temperature in a
timely manner, and standardize the patient's case data;
6. Unified management of waste.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-31 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2.10 RF heating
Radio frequency (RF) power can produce localized heating during
scanning. The specific absorption rate (SAR) measures the radio fre-
quency power absorbed per unit of mass of an object and is mea-
sured in watts/kilogram (W/kg). Ensure that you correctly enter the
patient’s weight when entering patient data, as this value is used to
compute SAR values.
Since the heating of internal tissue cannot be directly measured,
operating guidelines based on the SAR value of the RF magnetic field
have been established (See Chapter 2.21 Accident reporting proce-
dures).

WARNING! Please carefully confirm the patient's weight

information and enter it correctly, because the
system calculates the SAR value from this data.
The NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging system estab-
lishes different SAR limits based on different types of inspections.
Anyone, regardless of health status, should be able to tolerate this
value. People with unimpaired thermoregulatory and cardiovascular
systems should be able to tolerate a higher whole-body SAR. Ordi-
nary imaging sequences do not induce significant RF absorption.
Although the SAR of these sequences is calculated, it is usually not
displayed. Some sequences, such as TSE sequences and MT pulse
sequences, possess more energy. When using them, SAR warning
messages may be encountered (See Chapter 2.12.1 SAR warning mes-
sages).
If exposure to RF elevates the temperature in the patient, the result-
ing tissue damage resembles a burn. For most organs, RF heating is
not a serious concern, because an adequate blood flow absorbs the
heat from the affected tissue and dissipates it throughout the body.
Other organs, such as the lens of the eye and the testes, do not have
the blood volume required to adequately absorb a large change in tis-
sue temperature; tissue damage is more likely to occur in these
areas. Patients with circulatory difficulty, such as arteriosclerosis or
aneurysms, are more likely to experience excess heating. The circu-
latory problem impedes the blood’s ability to diffuse the effects of
localized heating.
Other factors can also affect the localized heating produced by RF
magnetic fields:

NPD-MRI-1301 2-32 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• Conductive (metallic) objects or surgical implants in the scanned

areahigher peak RF power used by certain coils and sequences
• Peak RF values used by certain coils and sequences

2.11 Field variations produced by the gradient

system
The gradient system produces a time varying magnetic field. Accord-
ing to Faraday's law of electromagnetic induction, a changing mag-
netic field will generate an induced electromotive force in a
conductor, thereby generating a current. Human tissue acts as a
conductor that also produces current when the magnetic flux passing
through it changes. The induced current of the gradient field is the
main basis of its biological effects.
The peripheral nerve stimulation induced by the MRI time-varying
gradient field has been confirmed. The general neuromuscular stimu-
lation symptoms have no obvious damage, and only the discomfort
and painful peripheral nerve muscle stimulation symptoms must be
avoided. It is generally accepted that patients with metal wires
implanted or left in anatomical or functionally sensitive areas (such
as the brain, myocardium, or epicardium) are at high risk for MRI,
especially with fast sequences such as planar echo sequences (possi-
bly For diffusion-weighted imaging, functional imaging, perfusion-
weighted imaging, MRI angiography, and so on.) when scanning.
When imaging high-risk patients, parameters such as gradient mag-
netic field switching rate and gradient field strength should be set as
low as possible, and the scanning process should be closely moni-
tored.

NOTE With the routine protocols it is unlikely that a

patient will experience peripheral nerve stimula-
tion. However, you should be familiar with the
phenomenon and know what to do if a patient
does experience stimulation.

2.11.1Informing the patient

You should, prior to scanning:
• Inform the patients that peripheral nerve stimulation may occur.
• Prompt the patient to hear a similar tapping sound during the scan
and provide the patient with hearing protection equipment.
• Prompt the patient not to hold the two hands.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-33 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• Prompt the patient not to move any part of the body near the
receiving coil.
• Ensure that the patient is clear and the operator can observe the
patient at any time.
• Instruct the patient to inform the operator if they feel severe dis-
comfort or pain.
• Explain to the patient how to use the alarm ball.
• Make sure to stay in touch with the patient.

2.11.2Rate of change of the magnetic field

The rate of change of the magnetic field is measured in Tesla per sec-
ond (T/s) and its conventional symbol is dB/dt.
Different patients are sensitive at different dB/dt levels. A given dB/
dt level may cause peripheral nerve stimulation in some patients, but
have no effect on others. However, operating guidelines based on the
dB/dt level of the magnetic field have been established and widely
adopted.
At the normal operating mode, all of the MRI system’s operating
parameters are within recommended limits for protection against
safety hazards. When operating the scanner in this mode, only rou-
tine monitoring of patients is needed.
We measure and quantify patient exposure using the dB/dt measure-
ment method outlined in the IEC 60601-2-33 Ed3.2:2015.
In the NeuMR 1.5T MRI system, the maximum dB/dt operating level
during imaging for all gradient performance levels is limited to the
first level controlled operating mode level in the maximum imaging
volume.
Therefore, it is recommended that procedures have been established
to ensure that medical supervision is provided. Always when the
patient has an unstable medical condition, a trained medical person
should be in the magnet room to provide immediate care even when
you are operating in the normal operating mode. ( See Chapter 2.9
Patient monitoring).

2.11.3What happens if the patient experiences nerve

stimulation?
Most patients who have experienced peripheral nerve stimulation
have not reported any pain associated with the experience. However,
records indicate that if the patient clasps his hands together, he may
experience a sensation or tingling that extends the length of the arm.
NPD-MRI-1301 2-34 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Clasped hands may create a conductive loop that increases the possi-
bility of stimulation.
If a patient complains of severe discomfort or pain, you should imme-
diately terminate the scan and attend to the patient. You may
resume scanning using a sequence with a lower rate of change of
magnetic field (dB/dt, see below). You can obtain a lower dB/dt by
using thicker slices, a larger FOV, or a larger TE.
For every patient who complains about severe discomfort or painful
peripheral nerve stimulation, complete a report that describes the
effects of the stimulation and the imaging sequence parameters. For
more information of reporting incidents, see Chapter 2.21 Accident
reporting procedures.

2.12 Operating modes

IEC 60601-2-33 defines three operating modes:
• Normal operating mode: in normal operating mode, all patients
are recommended for routine monitoring without regard to physio-
logical factors.
• First level controlled operating mode: when in the first level con-
trolled operating modem, certain conditions may cause physical
discomfort to the patient, and medical monitoring should be per-
formed on the patient.
• Second level controlled operating mode: unable to perform second
controlled operating mode.
The NeuMR 1.5T MRI system is capable to operate in the normal
operating mode and the first level controlled operating mode. At the
normal operating mode, all of the MRI system’s operating parameters
are within recommended limits for protection against safety hazards.
When operating the scanner in the normal operating mode, only rou-
tine monitoring of patients is needed.
The first level controlled operating mode is one in which some operat-
ing parameters reach values that may cause undue physiological
stress to patients. In the NeuMR 1.5T MRI system the operating
mode levels are controlled by the system software according to the
method presented in the IEC 60601-2-33 Ed3.2:2015. When the first
level controlled operating mode limit is exceeded, the system
requests operator intervention. The scan cannot proceed without
intervention from the operator.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-35 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! The patients and MRI operators can experience

when the main static magnetic field is above the
level of the normal operating mode, paying par-
ticular attention to the effects that can be expe-
rienced if the patients or the MRI operator’s
head is moved rapidly while inside or close to
the MR Equipment, including vertigo, nausea and
a metallic taste in the mouth.

NOTE Patients are advised to remain stationary in the

high static magnetic field area.

NOTE The adequate training should be given to the MRI

operators to minimise adverse health effects
arising from the high static magnetic field.

NOTE Provide medical supervision for patients when

the scanner is at the first level controlled operat-
ing mode.

NOTE Unless the system displays a popup message

requiring you to confirm operation in the first
controlled operating mode, you are scanning in
the normal operating mode.

NOTE First level controlled operating mode may be

used when there is no risk to patient safety and
environmental conditions permit (temperature
less than 24 °C or 75 F and humidity less than
60%).

Even when you are operating in the normal operating mode, if the
patient has an unstable medical condition, a trained medical person
should be in the magnet room to provide immediate care. The follow-
ing list describes patients who should have medical supervision:
• febrile patient
• patients with an impaired ability to perspire
• cardiac decompensated patient
• pregnant women
• neonates and infants
• patients with respiratory disorders
NPD-MRI-1301 2-36 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2.12.1SAR warning messages

We measure and quantify patient exposure to SAR according to
methods and measurements based on the standard IEC 60601-2-33
Ed3.2: 2015 (Particular requirements for the safety of magnetic reso-
nance equipment for medical diagnosis).
The limits of the four types of SAR values in the first level controlled
operating mode and second level controlled operating mode of the
NeuMR 1.5T system are shown in the Table 2-6.

NOTE In order to make the SAR value based on the cor-

rect data, please input the weight of the patient
correctly.

Table 2-6 Four types of SAR limits

Whole body Head SAR Local torso Local
SAR (W/kg) (W/kg) SAR (W/kg) extremity
SAR (W/kg)

First level controlled 2.0 3.2 10.0 20.0

operating mode

Second level controlled 4.0 3.2 20.0 40.0

operating mode

The static magnetic field, gradient and SAR levels for patients are
based on current scientific literature related to safety, and that the
level of exposure, the decision of leaving the normal operating mode
and the possible need for physiological monitoring of the patients
shall be a medical judgement as to the patients’ potential risk versus
benefit.
After a sequence has been prepared, the SAR calculations take place.
If the calculated SAR value exceeds the limit of the first level con-
trolled operating mode, the system will give a prompt message ask-
ing the operator to intervene, the message is shown in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 High SAR warning
Warning:
***a SAR sequence - Operator action required

The estimated SAR for this sequence is *b W/kg. This exceeds the normal
operating mode limit *c W/kg. This level of SAR could prove stressful or dan-
gerous for some patients. Medical supervision is required. Please check the
patient weight you have inserted.

Conditions that require special attention include pregnancy, infants, feverish

patients, elderly impaired cardiovascular function, or drugs which reduce
thermoregulation. Consult the Instructions for use.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-37 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 2-7 High SAR warning

The SAR level can be reduced by decreasing flip angles, number of slices,
number of presaturation regions, etc. or by increasing the repetition times.

Information regarding the level of exposure will be recorded with the scan.

Do you authorize this sequence to be scanned at dB/dt levels higher than the
normal operating mode limit?
a. According to the type of SAR value, *** will be displayed as: whole body,
head, local torso, local extremity.
b. * will be displayed as a specific value in the actual scan.
c. * will be displayed as a specific value in the actual scan.

WARNING! Fetus, less than three months pregnant, fetal

organ formation or fetal organ development
occurs in the first trimester of pregnancy. At the
critical time before the birth of the fetus, the
harm to the fetus should be minimized. The
operator needs to pay special attention to the
patient's SAR value.
If the SAR value reaches the limit of the first level controlled operat-
ing mode and the appropriate response is allowed to the scan, you
will see the information in Table 2-8:
Table 2-8 High SAR value warning
WARNING: the estimated ***a SAR value (*b W/kg) exceeds Normal level
(*c W/kg). The operator has allowed this level Continues?

a. According to the type of SAR value, *** will be displayed as: whole body,
head, local torso, local extremity.
b. * will be displayed as a specific value in the actual scan.
c. * will be displayed as a specific value in the actual scan.
If the SAR value exceeds the second controlled operating mode limit,
the information in the will appear. If this message appears, the scan
cannot be performed and the scan parameters must be adjusted
accordingly.
Table 2-9 Error message
ERROR: Maximum allowed head SAR *a W/kg exceeded SAR: *b W/kg.
Please increase the repetition time or decrease the number of slices.

a. * will be displayed as a specific value in the actual scan.

b. * will be displayed as a specific value in the actual scan.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-38 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! It is user’s responsibility to take care of the fol-

lowing: The SAR limit values are valid for room
temperatures 24 °C and below. At higher tem-
peratures, these values shall be reduced
depending on actual environmental temperature
and humidity. The reduction of SAR limits for
environmental temperature starts at the derat-
ing temperature. The derating temperature is 25
°C for relative humidity <60%. When the rela-
tive humidity exceeds 60%, the derating tem-
perature decreases by 0.25 °C for every 10%
increase.(e.g. the derating temperature is 24 °C
at 100% relative humidity). For each degree of
environmental temperature that exceeds the
SAR-derating temperature, the whole body SAR
limit shall be reduced by 0.25 W/kg until the
SAR is 2 W/kg or 0 W/kg for first level con-
trolled operating mode or normal operating
mode, respectively. (IEC 60601-2-33 E
d3.2:2015) (See Fig 2-6).

Fig. 2-6 SAR limit values according to the room temperature and humidity.

NOTE To reduce the risk from high SAR scanning, such

as the need for breaks for the patient to cool

NPD-MRI-1301 2-39 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

down, light clothing for the patient and adequate

ventilation of the patient space.

2.12.2dB/dt warning messages

After a sequence has been prepared, the dB/dt calculations take-
place. dB/dt limit is 89.5T/s for First Level Controlled Operating
Mode, and 71.6T/s for Normal Operating Mode.
Before starting a scan which operates at controlled operating mode,
an indication of the operating mode is displayed at the console. Sys-
tem software will calculate dB/dt for each scan, and compare the
value with the limit 71.6T/s for normal operating mode and 89.5T/s
for first level controlling mode. If the dB/dt value is more than 71.6T/
s of normal operating mode, there is a Warning pop-up and the value
will be displayed on the user interface.
If the rate of change of the magnetic field exceeds the normal oper-
ating mode limit, the following high dB/dt warning message is shown,
see Table 2-10.
Table 2-10 High dB/dt warning
WARNING: High dB/dt sequence - Operator action required

The estimated dB/dt for this sequence exceeds the normal operating mode.
Worst case: limit value is *a T/s, estimated value is *b T/s. This level of dB/dt
may result in peripheral nerve stimulation.

You must inform the patient of possible stimulation and describe the nature
of the sensation. Instruct the patient not to clasp his hands. Maintain con-
stant contact with the patient.

Conditions that require special attention include pregnancy, infants, feverish

patients, elderly, metallic implants, known cardiac arrhythmias or patients
unable to respond due to medication or medical reasons. Please consult the
Instructions for use.

Information regarding the level of exposure will be recorded with the scan.

Do you authorize this sequence to be scanned at dB/dt levels higher than the
normal operating mode limit?

a. * will be displayed as a specific value in the actual scan.

b. * will be displayed as a specific value in the actual scan.

WARNING! Fetus, less than three months pregnant, fetal

organ formation or fetal organ development

NPD-MRI-1301 2-40 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

occurs in the first trimester of pregnancy. At the

critical time before the birth of the fetus, the
harm to the fetus should be minimized. The
operator needs to pay special attention to the
patient's dB/dt value.
If the dB/dt is within the first level controlled operating mode, and
you have responded appropriately to permit the scan, you will see
another message if you make additional adjustments to the scan
parameters, see Table 2-11:
Table 2-11 High dB/dt warning
Warning: The estimated dB/dt for this sequence exceeds the normal operat-
ing mode limit. Inform the patient of possible stimulation. Medical supervi-
sion is advised. The operator has allowed this level. Continue?

The following message appears if the calculated dB/dt value exceeds

the first level controlled operating mode limit, see Table 2-12. If this
message is encountered, imaging is disabled.
Table 2-12 Error message
Error: The estimated dB/dt for this sequence exceeds the maximum allowed.
Please modify sequence parameters.

2.13 Acoustic noise

In the superconducting field, the high changing frequency current
that flow through gradient coil product vibration in audio frequency.
It presents as loudly shock sound. The A-weighted r.m.s sound pres-
sure level is meassured according to NEMA MS 4:2010. The sound
pressure of all sequences is no more than 140dB. Although the A-
weighted r.m.s sound pressure of some sequence of individual
advanced functions exceeds 99dB(A), use the hearing protection
should be sufficient to reduce the A-weighted r.m.s sound pressure
level below 99dB(A).
Some patients may experience discomfort from the associated noise
level of the scanner. Before scanning, you should give each patient
ear plugs. We strongly required that you provide patients with ear-
plugs that reduce the sound level by at least 30dB. Some MRI scan-
ners are capable of producing very high acoustic noise levels. Sound
levels outside of the scan room should be periodically checked to
make sure that they comply with applicable local regulations and
guidelines.
Special attention and special training for the operator is required for
proper positioning of the hearing protection, especially when stan-

NPD-MRI-1301 2-41 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

dard ear cuffs cannot be applied, or no protection at all can be

applied, as for neonates and premature infants.

WARNING! Due to increased anxiety, accepted sound pres-

sure levels can still be of concern to pregnant
women and the foetus, to new-borns, infants
and young children and to the elderly.

WARNING! The risk of temporary or permanent hearing

impairment if adequate hearing protection is not
used.

NOTE The anaesthetised patients can have less than

normal protection against high sound pressure,
so that ear protection for these patients should
not be omitted even at moderate sound levels.

NOTE In some countries legislation may exist covering

the exposure of personnel to noise.

NOTE The MRI operator shall wear adequate hearing

protection to reach compliance with the rules for
protection of personnel to noise.

2.14 Electrical and mechanical hazards

Although no known hazards to persons exposed to a magnet at field
exist, take all necessary precautions while operating MRI equipment.

WARNING! Instruct the patient not to touch any metallic

surface while scanning.

2.14.1Symptoms caused by an electrical shock

Contact with electrical circuits causes electrical shock. A shock victim
may experience any or all of the following symptoms:

NPD-MRI-1301 2-42 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• jarring, shaking sensation

• sensation of a sudden blow
• burns of varying degrees at area of contact
• breathing stops
• unconsciousness
• ventricular fibrillation
• cardiac arrest

2.14.2Caring for electrical shock victims

If someone experiences an electrical shock, take the following steps
to care for the victim:
• Remove power from primary switch
• Remove the victim without shocking yourself; if necessary, use a
non-conductor of electricity to pull the victim away from the elec-
trical contact
If the victim is breathing:
• Keep the victim lying down to avoid further trauma to the heart
and keep the patient comfortable
• Loosen clothing
• Call for medical assistance
If the victim is not breathing:
• Perform cardiopulmonary respiration
• Call immediately for medical assistance

2.14.3Electrical fires
Equipment overheating, short circuits, friction, or radio frequency
arcs can cause electrical fires. If an electrical fire occurs, remove
power from all nearby equipment, if possible.
If a fire breaks in the scanning room, first press the “EMERGENCY
STOP“ button to remove the magnetic field before bringing the fire
extinguisher into the scanning room.

WARNING! Use a "MRI Safety" (non-magnetic) fire extin-

guisher to extinguish the fire. If you use water

NPD-MRI-1301 2-43 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

or other liquid fire extinguishers, it can cause

serious damage.
MRI operators should be trained in the use of fire extinguishers and
other fire extinguishing equipment.
We recommend that the user should discuss fire precautions with the
local fire department and establish emergency procedures.

2.15 Explosive hazards

WARNING! This device is not suitable for use in the pres-

ence of flammable anesthetics, in combination
with air, oxygen, or nitrous oxide. Use of this
device in this kind of a combination presents an
explosive hazard.

2.16 Chemical hazards

The liquid in the phantoms used for Daily Quality Assurance is a
water solution. This solution is of a low concentration and is not con-
sidered especially hazardous. However, as a precaution, we recom-
mend that you avoid all direct contact with the phantom liquid (skin
contact, digestion, etc.). Wear protective gloves if you need to handle
the liquid in the open. No special precautions are required while han-
dling sealed phantoms.
If a phantom is broken or leaks, follow these instructions:
1. Wear disposable protective gloves.
2. Limit any potential further damage by placing the phantom in a
watertight vessel (such as a bucket).
3. Wipe the liquid spill off with a soft cloth. Dispose of the cloth or
wash it in plenty of warm water.
4. Clean the soiled surface(s) using warm water (See Chapter 9
Maintenance and Cleaning).
5. Dispose of the gloves and wash your hands.
6. Contact Service Department for phantom repair or replacement.
If phantom liquid is spilled on your skin or clothes, wash the affected
part of your skin with water and soap. Wash the clothes that the liq-
uid was spilled on. Contact a physician if there are any ill effects that
may have been caused by the liquid.
NPD-MRI-1301 2-44 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

If a person gets phantom liquid in his eyes, immediately wash it away

with plenty of water. Contact a physician. If a person ingests phan-
tom liquid, immediately consult a physician.

2.17 RF hazards
The RF power amplifier in a NeuMR 1.5T system can generate more
than 16 kW (peak).
The peak wattage of the RF power amplifier can cause severe RF
burns and other injuries if not used and maintained properly.
In addition, the amplifier produces lethal voltages in its operation.
The voltage present in the amplifier can cause serious or fatal inju-
ries.

WARNING! Only trained personnel are allowed to service

the RF power amplifiers. The RF power amplifi-
ers do not contain user-serviceable parts.

2.18 RF enclosure
The scan room is an RF enclosure, a room shielded with metal against
radio frequency interference. The foremost reason behind this
arrangement is to isolate the equipment in the scan room from exter-
nal disturbances, although the RF enclosure also attenuates emana-
tions from the MRI scanner that could disturb sensitive equipment. As
an MRI scanner has to be able to detect weak RF pulses that return
from the object being scanned, even distant radio transmissions
could interfere with the imaging process if the room was not shielded.
Filters on cables and optical fiber communication help to prevent RF
leaks through penetrations. There is a special RF Penetration Panel to
facilitate wall penetration between the scan room and the equipment
room. To ensure good image quality, always remember to close the
scan room door tightly before you start scanning. That helps to keep
the RF noise out.

2.19 Cryogen notices

Liquid helium is used in the Magnet System to cool the magnet wind-
ings, in order to achieve and maintain a superconducting state. The
filling of liquid helium is done by a professional. Under normal cir-

NPD-MRI-1301 2-45 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

cumstances, a small amount of liquid helium will boil and turn into a
gas, and this part of helium will not cause danger in the ventilation
area.
Helium is colorless, odorless, and tasteless. In liquid form, as
employed in superconducting applications, it has two properties that
are potentially hazardous:
1. It is extremely cold, 4.2K (-269°C).
2. Small amounts of liquid evaporate to produce large volumes of
gas, which can present a risk of asphyxiation due to the displace-
ment of the available oxygen.
The minimum level of liquid helium required for normal operation of
the NeuMR 1.5T system is 35%. When the liquid level is lower than
50%, it will prompt the supplement of liquid helium. The software
prompts” The liquid level is too low! Contact customer service per-
son.” When the liquid level is below 35%, the software prompt “The
liquid level is too low! Scanning has been banned. Please contact cus-
tomer service and arrange for filling.“
When quenching, a large amount of helium released must be
removed by a dedicated exhaust system, otherwise it is dangerous.
The design of the quench tube exhaust system protects nearby per-
sonnel in the event of a quench.
During the storage process, the liquid level of the liquid helium
should be checked from time to time, and the liquid level should not
be lower than 35%.

Initial liquid level 25% 50% 75% 100%

Liquid helium maximum 14 21 28 36

refill time(days)

NOTE When injecting liquid helium, the oxygenated liq-

uid drips on the metal coated with flammable
materials, the insulation is damaged, and the
conductive liquid (such as soapy water, coffee,
soup and salt) penetrates into the equipment to
cause a short circuit, which may cause a fire.

NOTE The loss of liquid helium volatilization caused by

the customer is borne by the customer. The rea-
sons for the customer include: no power outage,
failure to follow the manual or document
NPD-MRI-1301 2-46 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

requirements for product operation monitoring,

and no abnormalities or abnormalities were
found in time, and the repairs were not made in
time.

NOTE Frequent checks of cryogen level(s) should be

carried out by the responsible organization.

2.19.1Liquid helium compressor

The following precautions must be observed when dealing with, or
handling, liquid helium to avoid personal injury and/or damage to the
equipment or surroundings.
The liquid helium compressor needs 24 hours power supply, if
stopped the compressor working will result in liquid helium evaporat-
ing. Please operate according to the following requirements:
• When work normally, the compressor will vibrate, and the cold
head will make a “jingle, jingle“ sound;
• When the compressor stops working, there is no sound from the
cold head;
• Normally, the compressor will start running automatically when
the power supply restored. But sometimes the compressor may
enter protection state that need manually reset. Turn the button
on the power panel to "Main Power" (that is, horizontal position),
10 seconds after, turn it to "Close" (that is, vertical position), at
the same time set "Drive" button in "ON" condition. Then the
compressor should be started and the magnet issues a fizz sound.
If no sound came out, waiting for 5 minutes and then repeat the
operation until the compressor starts properly.
• Waiting for 20 minutes, if the compressor worked normally indi-
cates the system operating normally.

WARNING! Helium gas displaces oxygen necessary for

breathing in confined, poorly ventilated areas.
Helium is odorless, colorless, and tasteless and
cannot be detected by human senses. In suffi-
cient concentration, helium will cause uncon-
sciousness and possibly death due to lack of
oxygen.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-47 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! If a quench occurs when a lead port cap or the

helium fill port cap has been removed, cold
helium gas will vent from the lead port or fill
port instead of through the vent system. This
could result in death due to suffocation.

WARNING! Before entering a high helium/low oxygen area,

ventilate the area and use supplemental breath-
ing apparatus.

WARNING! Helium overdose causes loss of blood oxygen

and may result in severe injury or death due to
oxygen starvation (asphyxiation).

WARNING! Check the oxygen concentration with oxygen

level monitor. The minumum oxygen concentra-
tion that can enter without oxygen mask must
reach 19.5%.

WARNING! If the magnet is energized, use only nonmag-

netic breathing apparatus.

NOTE EXTREME COLD - Liquid helium is used in the

magnet system. It is extremely cold. The liquid,
or cold vapor from the liquid, can cause cold con-
tact burns and damage to the eyes and skin.

NOTE EXTREME COLD - Do not touch vapor plumes or

frosted pipes or valves.

NOTE EXTREME COLD - Do not stand directly in front of

an open lead port. If a quench occurs during the
NPD-MRI-1301 2-48 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

insertion of a high current lead, extremely cold

helium gas will flow rapidly from the open lead
port.

NOTE EXTREME COLD - Use extreme care when han-

dling liquid helium; boiling and splashing may
occur when filling a warm container or when
inserting warm objects into the liquid.

NOTE EXTREME COLD - When inserting open-ended

pipes into liquid helium, never direct the open
end of the pipe toward any person.

NOTE EXTREME COLD - Prolonged exposure of unpro-

tected skin to cold atmosphere can result in cold
contact burns.

NOTE EXTREME COLD - Protective equipment and

clothing approved for use with cryogens must be
worn to protect the eyes and skin whenever han-
dling or working with the liquid helium or cold
vapor from the liquid.

NOTE The storage of grease and oil or flammable

material in the scan room is strictly prohibited.

2.20 Emergency procedures

MRI operators must develop a plan for emergencies to ensure patient
safety in an emergency. At the same time, for the following high-risk
patients, preventive measures are needed to ensure that the prepa-
ration of outdoor emergency equipment is in place.
• patients with heart disease
• patients with epilepsy or susceptibility to claustrophobia
• patients who are seriously ill, mentally confused or lose conscious-
ness, who are anesthetized or unable to communicate normally,
such as children
These plans and measures must define the fastest way to transfer
patients from the scan area or controlled entrance to prevent an
emergency. If necessary, the “magnet emergency stop“ button must
be used, see Chapter 2.20.2 Emergency magnet quench procedures.

NOTE When dealing with emergencies, keep in mind

that magnetic emergency items must be outside

NPD-MRI-1301 2-49 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

the restricted area. The trolleys and emergency

equipment (clamps, needle holders, scissors,
tweezers), ventilators, sphygmomanometers,
stethoscopes, oximeters, and monitors used by
medical and rescue personnel should be MRI
safe, non-magnetic devices.

2.20.1Emergency power stop procedures

In the emergency situation, for example, patient suffers from the
danger caused by patient table or other electric device. It must be
press the Power On/Off button to shut down the power quickly, and
evacuate the patient from the scan room. The Power On/Off button
is on MR BOX, see Fig 2-7.

Fig. 2-7 Power stop button

NOTE The Power On/Off button is only used to shut

down the power, not used for magnet quench.

2.20.2Emergency magnet quench procedures

There are two magnet quench buttons, one is on the MR BOX, as
shown in Fig 2-8, the other one is in the scanning room. The quench
button is a manual forced active quench control button. The quench
button should be placed in a prominent position in the magnet com-
partment. The MR BOX in the operating room is recommended to be
placed on the console. Its role is to quickly reduce the static magnetic

NPD-MRI-1301 2-50 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

field to zero in emergency and dangerous situations. This button is

only used in the following emergency situations:
• The object is attracted by the magnet, causing damage to the
patient or the operator.
• In the event of an earthquake, fire, or emergency that jeopardizes
the life of the patient.
• In other cases where immediate demagnetization is required.
For safety reasons, an isolation cover is added to the emergency
quench switch, and the abnormal operation of the button by the per-
son entering and leaving the magnet is strictly controlled.

Fig. 2-8 Quench button

The steps to operate the quench button are:
• Make sure no one is standing or near the top of the magnet.
• Let the people around evacuate.
• Press the quench button.

WARNING! Only the scan operator can decide to use the

quench button. Do not turn on the quench but-
ton without scanning or normal scanning.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-51 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Prepare an emergency protocol for the quick

removal of the patient from the scan room and
from the controlled access area.

WARNING! All personnel are quickly removed from the

magnet before pressing the magnet emergency
stop button to prevent low temperature helium
from injuring personnel in the magnet room.
Quench will produce loud noise. In 5-6 minutes,
most of the liquid helium inside the magnet is
converted to low temperature helium gas and
discharged through the quench tube. During this
time, all personnel must stay away from the
magnet and keep the door between the magnet
open so that helium leaking between the magnet
can be exchanged between the magnet by air
exchange. Only one hour after the quench can
enter the magnet room. Any operation after the
quench must be performed by a fully trained
servic e personnel.

WARNING! Only when the exhaust system fails, the quench-

ing creates a danger, and a large amount of gas
converted from liquid boiling between the mag-
nets will cause the patient and the worker to
suffocate. There is a need to develop a plan for
the rapid evacuation of patients and staff from
the magnets in such cases.

2.21 Accident reporting procedures

If an accident or injury occurs that involves our equipment, take the
following steps:
• call the local service office immediately to report the accident or
injury

NPD-MRI-1301 2-52 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• do not disturb the equipment unless it is necessary to prevent fur-

ther injury
• gather all operator and maintenance logs for the equipment
• locate witnesses to the accident
An authorized investigation will be made, and the investigators need
to analyze the equipment in its configuration during the accident.
Provide the investigation team with operational and maintenance logs
as well as witnesses to the accident. The investigators will use the
gathered information to determine the cause of the accident and the
condition of the unit.

2.22 Image quality

WARNING! MRI images may show structures that are not

present in the patient, or incorrect contrast,
position, size, or shape, which may lead to mis-
diagnosis.
These results may be due to technical and physiological factors, or
due to magnetic objects on the patient’s body, or false signals gener-
ated by system components or other sources near the system.

2.22.1Instrinsic artifacts
MRI technical capabilities and patient physiology (e.g. magnet homo-
geneity,gradient linearity, truncation, aliasing, motion, flow, chemical
shift, susceptibilit variations, etc.), may result in artifacts which
appear in the image (e.g. image non-uniformity, geometric distor-
tion, ghosts, wraparound etc.). Methods of correctingor mitigating
such effects (e.g. changing bandwidth, gradient momentnulling, pre-
saturation, etc.) are described in subsequent sections.

2.22.2Extrinsic artifacts
Do not allow iron, other magnetic objects or non-magnetic metallic
objects such as jewellery, hairpins, buttons, prosthetics, etc. to be
brought into the magnet. These objects will disturb the RF signal or
will influence the homogeneity of the magnet and will interface with
the imaging capabilities of the system. This may lead to clinical mis-
diagnosis.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-53 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Do not bring magnetic or non-magnetic metal

objects into the magnet unless they are needed
for proper inspection and proper control.

2.23 Network security

2.23.1Type
Health data: Personal data identifying a patient's identity, including
the patient's name, age, gender, etc. Private data indicating the
patient's physiological and psychological monitoring status, involving
the patient's private information.
Device data: Data describing the health of the device, used to moni-
tor, control, or maintain the device. It does not involve patient pri-
vacy information, including system operation error messages, logs,
and screen shots.

2.23.2Function
Electronic data interchange: Two-way electronic data exchange over
a network. The data transmission and data format conform to the
DICOM standard.
Remote control: The system provides real-time remote control ser-
vices through NSA.

2.23.3Application
The medical magnetic resonance imaging system is a medical imag-
ing device for providing non-ionizing radiation non-ionizing detection
of physiological and clinical information of various parts of the whole
body, and the device can obtain any part of the whole body of the
patient in accordance with the MRI scanning condition by the opera-
tion of a qualified person. Sliced medical image information for clini-
cal diagnosis.

2.23.4Exchange method
Network:
• Wired network requirements: Ethernet (100M/1000M or above) is
required on the workstation PC side.
NPD-MRI-1301 2-54 Safety
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Storage medium:
• CD requirements: CD/DVD, the size depends on the size of the
data, and the CD/DVD is required to support writing when export-
ing data.
• Mobile hard disk/USB disk requirements: Supports external stor-
age devices with USB2.0 and above to export and import images.

2.23.5Security software
Antivirus software:
• Name: McAfee VirusScan
• Version number: 6.0.3
• Supplier: McAfee
• Operating environment requirements: Follow the MRI scan console
runtime environment.
• Requirements: Call McAfee VirusScan Command Line anti-virus
software for virus detection. Support offline scanning, or you can
check the virus by setting the operating tasks of the operating sys-
tem.
Firewall: Set the operating system's services through the firewall and
port policies of the programs in the operating system.

2.24 Gradient field

IEC 60601 requires field plots that describe the magnetic field gradi-
ent using iso contour lines. More specifically: The position in locations
outside the FIXED magnet covers where SPATIAL FIELD GRADIENT
(SFG) is maximum, and the values of B0 and the SFG at that loca-
tion. At this location the force on a saturated ferromagnetic object
resulting from the spatial gradient of the main magnetic field is max-
imum.
Maximum values and positions are computed, one for each plane
quadrant. Fig 2-9 shows the gradient of the field strength in the zx
plane at y=0. Table 2-13 lists the points with the maximum values.
The sub- and superscripted values denote changes due to mechanical
tolerances.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-55 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 2-9 | ▽ B|plot in the zx plane at y=0

Table 2-13 Positions and values of | ▽ B| maxima in zx plane. Tolerances denoted by sub-
and superscripts
position(z,x)[m] | ▽ B| [T/m] B[T]
+0.009 +0.4
(0.787 , 0.392 +0.009 ) 7.1 - 0.4 1.28
- 0.005 - 0.006
+0.010 +0.000
(-0.735 -0.010 , 0.300 - 0.000 ) 4.7
+0.0
1.39
- 0.0

2.25 B| ▽ B| field
IEC 60601 requires field plots that describe the product of the mag-
netic field gradient and the magnitude of the field strength using iso
contour lines. More specifically: The position in locations outside the
FIXED magnet covers where the product of the magnitude of the
static magnetic field B0 and the SFG is maximum and the value of B0
and SFG at that location. At this location, the force on a diamagnetic
or paramagnetic object, or a ferromagnetic material below its mag-
netic saturation point, is a maximum.
Fig 2-10 shows the product of the field strength and the gradient of
the field strength in the zx plane at y=0.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-56 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 2-14 lists the points with the maximum values, one in each
quadrant. The sub- and superscripted values denote changes due to
mechanical tolerances.

Fig. 2-10 B| ▽ B| plot in the zx plane at y=0

Table 2-14 Positions and values of B|▽B| maxima in the zx plane. Tolerances denoted by
sub- and supercripts.
position (z,x)[m] B| ▽ B| [T2/m] B[T] | ▽ B| [T/m]
+0.008 +0.006
(0.752- 0.021 , 0.360 - 0.016 ) 9.8 +0.8
- 0.7
1.45 6.76
+0.010 +0.000
(0.688 - 0.010 , 0.300 - 0.000 ) +0.0
7.0 - 0.0 1.56 4.46

2.26 Main field

IEC 60601 requires field plots that describe the magnitude of the field
strength using iso contour lines. More specifically: A plot representing
iso-magnetic contours of the static magnetic field at positions acces-
sible to and relevant for the MR WORKER shall be provided.
Fig 2-11 shows the absolute value B of the main magnetic field in the
zx plane at y=0.

NPD-MRI-1301 2-57 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 2-11 B plot of main magnetic field in the zx plane

NPD-MRI-1301 2-58 Safety

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 3 System

3.1 System composition

NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging system contains of
the following components: magnet subsystem, patient table, system
cabinet, GA, QBC, receive coils [AIM NV (24CH), AIM Spine (21CH),
AIM Torso (12CH), AIM GP Flex M (8CH, optional), AIM GP Flex S
(8CH, optional), AIM Loop Flex (2CH, optional), Breast Coil (8CH,
optional), Knee Coil (8CH, optional), Shoulder Coil (8CH, optional),
Head Coil (8CH, optional)], LCC, console, physiology gating
(optional), intercom, MR BOX, software system.
Software Version: 1
For the relevant technical information, please refer to the Product
Information Manual.

3.1.1 Magnet assembly

The superconducting magnet subsystem includes a superconducting
magnet, a gradient coil, and corresponding fixed mountings.
Superconducting magnets: Magnets are one of the key components
of an MRI imaging system that provides an MRI imaging system with
a sufficiently uniform magnetic field in the imaging space. The medi-
cal superconducting magnet is cooled by liquid helium. When per-
forming a magnetic resonance examination, the patient is positioned
in a magnetic field.
Gradient Coils: Three-dimensional gradient coils provide a three-
dimensional gradient field for imaging.

3.1.2 Patient table

The patient table is a mobile patient system that moves the patient's
desired scanning site to the center of the magnet by horizontal/verti-
cal motion, and then removes the patient from the center of the
magnet after scanning.

3.1.3 System cabinet

The system cabinet includes RFA, spectrometers, and PDU systems.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-1 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

RFA: Used to drive the transmitting coil and emit high-power RF

pulses to resonate the protons of the human body;
Spectrometer: Consists of a timing control unit, a gradient waveform
generating unit, a radio frequency waveform generating unit, a radio
frequency signal receiving unit, and a data transmission unit for gen-
erating a magnetic resonance excitation signal and receiving the pro-
cessed magnetic resonance signal.

NOTE During the scan, the software monitors the sta-

tus of the RF amplifier. If the RF amplifier is shut
down, connection failure or internal error, the
software will pop up a warning message and
stop scan. The monitior progamme will try to
eliminate the internal error and reset the status
of the RF amplifier. If success, a message
appears and the software is ready to start scan.

NOTE A new scout image is required to scan after

changing the patient or the coils.

3.1.4 GA
The GA (Gradient Amplifier) is used to drive three sets of gradient
coils, generate a gradient field in the imaging space, and obtain spa-
tial coordinates of the imaged portion, so that each pixel in the image
has a one-to-one correspondence with the imaged portion of the
human body.
Nominal B0 Value: 1.5T ± 0.0005T
Maximum gradient of the static magnetic field: 33mT/m ± 5%
Nominal frequency range per nuclei: 130mT/m/ms ± 5%
Maximum GRADIENT OUTPUT on a cylinder with a diameter of 0.2 m,
0.4 m and 0.5 m is in the following table:

0.2m 0.4m 0.5m

X 27.6 T/s 38.7 T/s 50 T/s

Y 27.6 T/s 38.7 T/s 50.2 T/s

Z 28.3 T/s 34.4 T/s 40.4 T/s

3.1.5 Console
The console includes a computer and an LCD display, and the com-
puter mainframe includes a hard disk drive, a magnet-optical disk
NPD-MRI-1301 3-2 System
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

drive for operating the interface and storing images, and an optical
disk drive. The display is used to display the scanning software and
the corresponding images.

3.1.6 QBC
The QBC (Quadrature Body Coil) coil is used to generate a radio fre-
quency transmit field and receive radio frequency signals.

3.1.7 RF receive coils

Used to receive RF signals. For details, see Chapter 5 Receive Coils.

3.1.8 LCC
The LCC (Liquid Cooling Cabinet) is used for heat exchange of the
system.

3.1.9 Physiology gating

Used to collect patient ECG, respiration, finger pulse data for
sequence trigger signal.

3.1.10Intercom
For the common communication between the operator and the
patient.

3.1.11MR BOX
Used for system boot function, main component status display and
quench function.

3.2 System operating environment requirements

MRI equipment must have proper environmental conditioning (heat-
ing and cooling) and ventilation systems. These systems provide a
safe and comfortable environment for patients and staff. The envi-
ronmental conditioning system prevents overheating of the electronic
device.
The environmental requirements for operating the NeuMR 1.5T sys-
tem are listed in the Table 3-1.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-3 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 3-1 Environmental requirements

Temperature

Scanning room 18°C ~ 22°C

Equimpent room 18°C ~ 26°C

Operating room 15°C ~ 30°C

Relative humidity

Scanning room 40% ~ 60%

Equimpent room 30% ~ 75%

Operating room 30% ~ 75%

WARNING It is forbidden to introduce power lines and sig-

nal lines into the scanning room to avoid electro-
magnetic interference.

3.3 System operation

3.3.1 Lighted bore ring

The lighted bore ring indicates the statue of system, see Fig 3-1:
• Light blue: sleeping mode
• Blue: wake up for work
• Flicker: ready for scanning
• Off: scanning

NPD-MRI-1301 3-4 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 3-1 Lighted bore ring

3.3.2 Control panel

On the both sides of the magnet cover have symmetrical control pan-
els. The following are the button meaning on the control panel:

NPD-MRI-1301 3-5 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

09 10
03

01
04 06
02

08 07
05

Fig. 3-2 Control panel

Table 3-2 Buttons and functions of control panel

No. Name Function

01 In and out knob Move the patient table in/out or

accelerate into/out of the
patient table

02 One-click into the patient table Automatically move the patient

table to the ISOCenter position

03 Laser positioning light Mark scan position

04 Near home Return the patient table to its

original position

05 One-click out of the patient Automatically move the petient

table table to the home location

NPD-MRI-1301 3-6 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 3-2 Buttons and functions of control panel

No. Name Function

06 Start/Stop scan Start or stop scan

Note: When using this button
start or stop the current scan, it
can only be operated once and
cannot be continuously
pressed. If the current scan
cannot continue or stop, con-
tinue with the software.

07 Lighting button Adjust the magnet born illumi-

nation, there are three levels of
brightness adjustable: low
brightness, medium brightness
and high brightness

08 Patient ventilation Adjust the ventilation of the

patient in the magnet born,
there are three levels of air vol-
ume adjustable: low air vol-
ume, medium air volume and
high air volume

09 Headphone button Turn on/off patient’s headphone

10 Page turning LCD display information page

turning

3.3.3 LCD
The LCD display can show the following information:

Table 3-3 LCD display content

No. Display content Function description

1 System information Ventilation (level)

Light (level)
Volume (level)
Coil name, status (socket status)
Patient table position

2 Patient information Basic inforation display (name, gender, date of

birth)/patient location/head or foot first and
body position display.

3 Physiology signal ECG/RESP/PPG-simultaneous display, including

waveform and rhythm/display quality display.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-7 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 3-3 LCD display content

No. Display content Function description

4 Warning informa- System error: displayed when the connector/

tion (accident coil/patient table/physiology signal is abnormal.
details)

5 Help Coil connection and placement, combination

method/laser light positioning/physiology gating
connection

You can scroll through the information on each page of the LCD
screen by using the Page up button on the control panel.

3.3.4 Patient table

The patient table is a system for moving patients that can move the
area that the patient needs to scan to the center of the magnet by
horizontal/vertical movement, and then remove the patient from the
magnet after scanning. The movement of the patient table can be
done via a button on the control panel or on the console (see Chapter
4 User Interface).

WARNING! The Chapter 2 Safety includes several important

warnings and cautions that you must observe to
ensure the safe use of the support. In particular,
read the part titled Patient Handling.
CAUTIONS! Patient whose weight exceeds 200kg can not use
the patient table to scan lest the patient table
should be damaged or personnel should be
injured.

3.3.4.1 Patient table movement

Move in/out
- Move in: Rotate the knob on the control panel to the raise/in
position and keep it, the patient table can be moved into the
magnet bore.
- Move out: Rotate the knob on the control panel to the descend/
out of position and keep it, the patient table can be moved from
the magnet bore.
If the knob is rotated to the acceleration position, the patient table
can be accelerated.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-8 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Raise/Descend
Before raising/descending the patient table, you need to move the
patient table to the Home position. You can choose between the fol-
lowing two methods:
- Auto Mode: Press One button to exit until the patient table
moves to the home position and stops automatically. Home
automatically decelerates before.
- Manual mode: Turn the knob to the descend/out position and
keep it until the patient table reaches the home position and
then release the knob. The knob automatically resets.
• Raise: Move the knob on the control panel to the raise/into the
table position and hold it down to raise the patient table or press
the HOME button to raise the table to the home position with one
button.
• Descend: The patient table must be descended in the Home posi-
tion. Rotate the knob on the control panel to the descend/out posi-
tion and hold it until the patient table reaches the appropriate
height and then release the knob.

3.3.4.2 Patient table back to scan plane

Using the Near Home button on the control panel, you can return to
the original position after the patient table has moved.
• After the pre-contrast scan is completed, use the Near Home key
or rotate the knob to rotate to the descend/out position to move
the patient table out of the magnet bore and not to the home posi-
tion.
• After injecting the contrast agent, you only need to press and hold
the One button into the table button again, and the patient table
will stop at the previously indicated ISOCenter.

NOTE Do not remove the patient table to the Home

position when there is no need to reposition, as
the positioning mark is cleared when the HOME
switch is triggered.

3.3.4.3 Stop or restore patient table in case of emergency

In the event of an emergency, there are two ways to stop moving the
patient table:
The first way:
Emergency stop:

NPD-MRI-1301 3-9 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

a. Press the emergency stop button on the side of the patient

table (both sides) to stop and release the movement of the
patient table, see Fig 3-3.

Fig. 3-3 Stop button

b. Manually remove the patient table from the magnet.
Restore patient table connection status:
Rotate the emergency stop button on the patient table (use the
same emergency stop button).
The second way:
Emergency stop:
a. Use the emergency stop button on the Intercom.
b. Manually remove the patient table from the magnet.
Restore patient table connection status:
Press the emergency stop state release switch on Intercom to can-
cel the emergency.

3.3.5 Intercom
Intercom is shown in Fig 3-2 and the functions are shown in Table 3-2.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-10 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

02 10 01

09
05
04
03

06 07 11 08

Fig. 3-4 Inercom

Table 3-4 Intercom function description

No. Name Function

01 Emergency stop Pressing this button will trigger an emergency,

table button the red light will flash, the patient table will stop
moving, and the table can be moved manually.
The emergency cannot be cancelled unless the
emergency release switch is pressed.

02 Alarm release but- When the patient triggers a pneumatic alarm,

ton the button light flashes and an Intercom box
horn sounds an alarm (the alarm sounds a beep)
and turns off all button functions (except for the
emergency stop table button). After pressing
Alarm release button, the button light goes off
and the alarm sound is turned off, and other key
functions are immediately restored to cancel the
alarm.

03 Patient volume Controls the volume of the Intercom speaker

adjustment knob (the size of the patient's voice heard by the doc-
tor).

04 Doctor volume The volume of the patient's headphone and the

adjustment knob wall speaker between the scans is controlled (the
patient hears the sound of the doctor's voice),
and the volume of the headphone and the
speaker is increased or decreased synchro-
nously.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-11 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 3-4 Intercom function description

No. Name Function

05 Music volume Controls the volume of music input externally

adjustment knob (the volume of the patient's headphone and the
wall speakers between scans).

06 Patient sound button Control the patient's voice, turn it on or off.

When the button is pressed, the LED aperture
lights up and the patient's voice is turned on,
which can be played through the speaker on the
Intercom. Press the button again, the LED aper-
ture is off, the patient's voice is turned off, and
the doctor cannot hear it.

07 Doctor intercom Control the doctor's voice, turn it on or off. Keep

button pressing the intercom switch button and keep it
from being released. At this time, the LED aper-
ture lights up and the doctor's voice is turned on.
During the scan, the patient can hear the doc-
tor's voice through the earphone or the speaker,
and the music sound stops playing. When the
intercom switch button is released, the LED
aperture is turned off, the doctor's voice is
turned off, the patient cannot hear the doctor's
speech, and the music resumes playing.

08 Music button Control external input music, turn it on or off.

When the button is pressed, the LED aperture
lights up and the external music starts to play,
and the patient can listen to the music through
the headphones and the wall speaker. Press the
button again, the LED aperture goes out and the
external music stops playing.

09 Emergency stop Release the emergency stop status. When the

release button button is pressed, the red light goes out and the
emergency is released.

10 Horn

11 Microphone

NOTE Please debug before use to ensure that the

patient can hear the instructions of the operator,
even if there is noise, the operator can hear the
patient's voice. You don't need to be too close to
the microphone when speaking.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-12 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

3.3.6 MR BOX
On the MR BOX has the following indicator lights and buttons (see
Fig 3-5):

• : Spectrometer indicator light

• : GA indicator light

• : Magnet indicator light

• : Power On/Off

• : RFA indicator light

• : LCC indicator light

• : Patient table indicator light

The indicator light is displayed in two colors after the system is work-
ing normally, white and yellow. White means nromal function, yellow
means fault, you can read detailed information from the computer.
The red button on the center is quench button, the more information
please refer to Chapter 2.20.2 Emergency magnet quench procedures.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-13 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 3-5 MR BOX

3.3.7 System start-up

The NeuMR 1.5T system uses a one-button operation that requires
only the Power On/Off button on the MR BOX or the green button on
the system cabinet/MR BOX to be turned on during daily booting.
The order for startup system is as the following:
1. Press the Power On/Off button on MR BOX or press the Scanning
Power On button on the system cabinet, the amplifier, sepctrome-
ter, patient table, console, and water cooling cabinet are powered
on.
2. Turn on the display and the host and start the workstation.
3. Click the MRI Scanner in the desktop MRI folder to enter the
login interface, enter the user name and password and click OK,
see Fig 3-6.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-14 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 3-6 Enter interface

4. The NeuMR 1.5T home screen appears on the monitor (See Fig 3-
7).

Fig. 3-7 The NeuMR 1.5T home interface.

NOTE For the Power On/Off button and the Scanning

Power On button, it is recommended that the two
button action intervals be 10 minutes .

NPD-MRI-1301 3-15 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

3.3.8 System shut-down/reboot

NOTE Shutting down the system is NOT needed during
normal use.

To shut down only the NeuMR 1.5T user interface, leaving the rest of
the system operational:
1. Keep the console display open.
2. Make sure the scan is complete.
3. Click the Neusoft button in the lower left corner of the main inter-

face and click to exit the software.

To shut down the system or to restart the computer:
1. Keep the console display open.
2. Make sure the scan is complete.
3. Click the Neusoft button in the lower left corner of the main inter-

face and click to exit the software.

4. Click Start/Shut down, or simultaneously press <Ctrl>, <Alt>, and
<Del> to display the Windows Security window.
5. In the Shutdown Computer dialog, select the Shut down/Reboot
option which is displayed in the combo-box. Press OK.
6. You can shut the system down safty after the system displays the
following message: windows is shutting down.
7. Press the Power On/Off button on the MR BOX or press the Scan-
ning Power Off on the system cabinet, the GA, RFA, spectrometer,
console, Patient table and LCC are powered off.

WARNING! The system software must be logged out before

the computer power switch is turned off to pre-
vent damage to the system software, files, or
data.

NOTE The user only needs to turn off the stop switch in
the system cabinet. The other power supplies are
normally open and do not require user operation.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-16 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NOTE For the Power On/Off button and Scanning

Power Off button, it is recommended that the
two button action intervals be 10 minutes.

NPD-MRI-1301 3-17 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NPD-MRI-1301 3-18 System

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 4 User Interface

This section describes how to operate the NeuMR 1.5T Medical Mag-
netic Resonance Imaging System user interface on the console.

4.1 Home interface

The home interface (Fig 4-1) contains three partitions: work area,
system navigation area, system status area:
• 1 - System navigation area: use to start each sub-workflow.
• 2 - Work area: the software is in different workflow steps and the
workspace displays different content.
• 3 - System status area: displays current system status, system
scan progress, system component status, and so on.

Fig. 4-1 Home interface

NPD-MRI-1301 4-1 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.1.1 System navigation bar

: Home. The patient management page launch button, click to

enter the patient management page.

: Registration. The patient registration page launch button, click

to enter the patient registration page. The patient registration page is
currently displayed by default at system startup.

: Scan. The patient examination page start button and click to

enter the patient examination page.

: Review. The image viewing page launch button, click to enter

the image browsing page.

: Film. The film prints the page launch button and click to enter
the film print page.

: Report. The report page launch button, click to enter the report
page.

: Help. Display the version information.

: Message Center. Display messages.

: Service. System settings and services, click to enter the settings

and services page. The user can configure the system.

4.1.2 System status bar

4.1.2.1 Description
The system scan status includes the sequence name, the current
sequence scan progress (percentage) and status, the current
sequence remaining time, the total scan progress and percentage of
the queue, and the total remaining time of the queue. The status is
ready to scan, scan, rebuild, pause, finished, and stop.

Fig. 4-2 Status bar

NPD-MRI-1301 4-2 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.1.2.2 Patient table control

Through the patient table control interface, the movement of the
table can be controlled to display the current relative position. The
intensity and brightness can also be adjusted via the fan and aper-
ture button, see Fig 4-3.

01 02

07

08

03 04 05 06

Fig. 4-3 Patient table control interface

Table 4-1 Function description

No. Function

01 Show current relative position

02 Input moving distance

03 Patient table automatic entry button

04 Stop patient table moving button

05 Near the start button, the patient table moves to

the Near Home position without canceling the
Mark status

06 Patient table automatic removal button

07 Fan wind adjustment button, blue and green

dots represent gear position

08 Aperture light brightness adjustment button,

blue and green dots represent gear position

NPD-MRI-1301 4-3 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.1.2.3 Task monitor

In the task monitor, you can view the task being executed. Click the
task monitor icon in the status bar at the lower left corner of the
interface to bring up the task monitor interface, see Fig 4-4.

Fig. 4-4 Task monitor

Table 4-2 Button function

No. Function

1 Start: Send a start command to

the selected task.

2 Stop: Send a stop command to

the selected task.

3 Delete: Send a delete command

to the selected task.

4 Clear: Clear the monitoring task

list and send instructions to
delete all the tasks in the task
list.

The meaning of each column of the task list:

- ID: The unique label of the task in the list.
- Name: Task name.
- Information: Task information.
- Progress: Progress of task execution.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-4 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Status: Status of task execution, including execution, stop, fail-

ure, completion, loss of contact.
The task has a secondary list that, when expanded, displays the sub-
task execution status of the task.

4.1.2.4 Auto view

Click the Auto View button to pop up the automatic preview window.
If the image reconstruction is completed, it will be automatically dis-
played in the automatic preview window.

Fig. 4-5 Auto View

4.1.2.5 Component status monitor list

The component status monitoring list form can be opened via the

component status monitoring button on the system status bar.

This form allows you to view system components including RF
amplifiers, gradient amplifiers, water-cooling units, magnet system,
spectrometer, patient table, ECG, RESP, PPG, temperature and
humidity of the equipment room and scanning room, etc. If there is
an error in the component, an error message can be displayed and a
manual reset operation can be performed (only RF and water cooling
are supported), see Fig 4-6. You can click Refresh to update the sta-
tus of each component.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-5 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-6 System state

4.2 Patient management

Click the button in the navigation bar to enter the patient man-
agement interface, see Fig 4-7.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-6 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

3 4

5
1

Fig. 4-7 Patient management

The patient management interface is divided into a patient examina-
tion list area, a patient management toolbar, a patient image direc-
tory area, an image preview area, and an image processing function
entry:
1 - Patient examination list area: Provides data such as patient
examination records (Study) and Series. The content displayed in
the patient examination list area can display U disk, CD and local
data according to the data source switching.
2 - Patient management toolbar: Provides various functions of
patient data management in the form of buttons. Depending on
the source of the patient's data, the management functions pro-
vided are different and the status of the buttons is different. For
example, local data can only be exported and cannot be imported;
non-local data cannot be edited.
3 - Patient image directory area: Provides a thumbnail of all
images of the selected Series record.
4 - Patient preview area: The image preview area displays a mag-
nified image of the currently selected image. The page turning
function is not provided, and only the function of modifying the
window width window position is provided.
5 - Image processing entry: Provides a quick jump to the image
post-processing function and directly loads the selected image
Series onto the image browsing page. These features are only

NPD-MRI-1301 4-7 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

valid for local data, and data from non-local data sources need to
be imported locally before they can be used.

4.2.1 Patient examination list

The patient examination list area displays the examination records of
all examined patients in the local database.
Patient management data and Series data that have been scanned
can be viewed in Patient Management, and the data can be deleted,
edited, searched, locked/unlocked, and the like.
The operation mark displays the related operations performed by the
examination record in the form of different letter icons. The markings
of each operation are: hardcopy (H), lock (L), and send (Pacs). The
data that has been manipulated is displayed as an icon and can be
searched.

You can click the plus sign on the left side of each inspection
record to expand the inspection record and display the Series of this
inspection scan, Fig 4-8.

Fig. 4-8 Patient examination list

The data can be sorted by clicking on the patient examination data
and the header of each column of the Series data. You can also filter
the data by selecting keywords in the filter tool below the headers of
each column.

4.2.2 Patient image directory and image preview

Select a series record in the patient examination list, the system pro-
vides thumbnails of all images of the Series in the image directory

NPD-MRI-1301 4-8 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

area, the image directory area automatically selects the first image,
and displays the first image in the image preview area.
Click on the thumbnail of any image in the image directory area and
the system will provide a larger image of the image in the image pre-
view area.
The image directory area can be used to scroll through the scroll
wheel to view the front or back image, one line at a time.
Drag the mouse wheel in the image preview area to adjust the win-
dow width window position of the image, see Fig 4-9.

Fig. 4-9 Adjust window width window position

4.2.3 Image processing

Select a study record or a seriesrecord in the patient examination list
area. Click the image function, Fig 4-10, you can quickly enter the
image browsing page, and directly load the selected image series.

Fig. 4-10 Image processing entry

NPD-MRI-1301 4-9 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.2.4 Patient management

4.2.4.1 Patient delete, detele permanently and lock

Delete: The user can select one or more studies to be deleted in the
patient examination list, or select one or more series records, and

then click the button in the patient management toolbar to

delete the data.
Delete Permanently: The user can select one or more studies to be
deleted in the patient examination list, or select one or more series
records, and then click the Delete Permanently button in the
patient management toolbar to delete the data.
You can also do this by right-clicking the Delete and Delete Perma-
nently button.
Lock: The user can select a study record to be deleted in the patient
examination list, or select a record, right click, and lock the data

through the lock function menu in the right-click menu. The data
that has been locked can be unlocked by selecting the unlock function

menu in the right-click menu by the same operation.

NOTE The locked data cannot be deleted and deleted

permanently. After unlocked, the data can be
operated.

NOTE Only the data of the local database can be

deleted, deleted permanently, locked, unlocked,
and other data cannot be operated.

4.2.4.2 Patient data query

Patient data query can be made through the query button in the
Patient Management toolbar. Enter the specified conditions in the
query conditions to perform the query. The results of the query are
displayed directly in the patient examination list area.
The patient examination list provides all checked data for the local
database when no query conditions are entered.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-10 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-11 Seach condition

Patient ID, Accession Number, Patient Name, Body Part-Organ: The

data containing the query keyword in the corresponding field will be
used as the query result, which is not case sensitive.
Gender, Exam Time: The query keywords of these two items need to
be selected from the drop-down list, and the data that meets the
query conditions will be used as the query result.
Series Operation Mark: The query keyword needs to be selected from
the drop-down list and the query is in sequence. For example, in a
study record, both the locked data and the unlocked data. If the
query selects a lock item in the query condition, only those locked
series will be used as the examination result, see Fig 4-12.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-11 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-12 Series operation mark

4.2.4.3 Patient data edit

The user can select a study record to be edited in the patient exami-
nation list, or select a series record and then click the Edit button

in the Patient Management toolbar to edit the patient data. Click

the OK button to confirm the modification, and click the Cancel but-
ton to cancel the modification.

NOTE The locked data cannot be edited and deleted

permanetly. After unlocking, it can be operated.

NOTE Only the data of the local database can be edited,

deleted permanetly, locked, unlocked, and other
data cannot be operated.

NOTE When editing patient data, the patient's name,

gender, birthday, and age can be modified, but
the accession number cannot be modified.

NOTE After modifying the patient information, the

patient information of this examination and the
data in the DICOM image will be modified.

NOTE When the patient's name, gender, birthday, etc.

are modified, the patient's entire history in the
system and the data in the DICOM image of the
entire history are modified.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-12 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.2.4.4 Recycle Bin management

Recycle Bin: You can open the Recycle Bin by selecting the recycle

button in the Patient Management toolbar. Patient data that has

been deleted can be viewed in the recycle Bin. The data in the Recy-
cle Bin is in the same form as the table in the patient examination list
area and is displayed as a two-level form. Click the plus sign on the
left side of the examination record to expand the examination record
and view the series data that has been deleted in this examination,
see Fig 4-13.

Fig. 4-13 Recycle Bin

Delete data: The user can select a study record, or select a series
data, right click, delete the data in a recycle Bin through the delete
menu item in the right-click menu; or click the Delete All button in
the recycle Bin delete all data in the recycle Bin.

NOTE Deleting data in the Recycle Bin is equivalent to

deleting permanetly the data and can no longer
be viewed and restored.

Restore data: The user can select a study record, or select a series
data, right click, and restore the data in a recycle through the recov-
ery menu item in the right-click menu. Or click the Restore All but-
ton in the recycle Bin to restore all the data in the recycle. After
restoring the data in the Recycle Bin, the data reappears in the
patient examination list on the Patient Management page.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-13 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.2.4.5 DICOM operation

4.2.4.5.1 Send image

Select multiple exams to be sent or multiple sequences under the

same examination on the patient list, and then click the Send button.
The send dialog box has a list of sending servers, and then select the
desired server to send.

4.2.4.5.2 Network query image

Click the Network Query button to pop up the query interface.

There are query buttons and server lists on the query interface. After
entering the query conditions and selecting the server, click Query to
send the query command to the server. After the query operation is
performed, the query result will appear in the query result list.

4.2.4.5.3 Import patient

There are two ways to import a patient:

- Select the disc in the data source, the main page displays the
main menu of all the inspection records on the disc, select mul-
tiple inspections or multiple sequences under the same inspec-
tion, and then click the Import button to import the selected
records into the local.
- Select the U disk in the data source, the main page displays the
main table of all the inspection records in the U disk, select
multiple inspections or multiple sequences under the same
inspection, and then click the Import button to import the
selected record image into local. Only the Power User and
above user rights can perform the function of importing U disk
data to the local.

4.2.4.5.4 Export patient

Select one or more studies in the local examination list, or select one
or more sequences for different examinations. Click the CD/DVD
Burn or USB Export button on the patient management interface to
bring up the Export Destination dialog box, which has a CD and all
U disks for recognition processing. After selecting a destination, click
the Export button to export the image to the destination. In addi-
tion, you can choose to hide patient information.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-14 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.3 Patient registration

Click the button in the navigation bar to enter the patient regis-
tration page, as shown in Fig 4-14. The patient registration page can
complete patient registration and pre-registration, and the registra-
tion page is displayed by default.

1 2 3

Fig. 4-14 Patient registration

The patient registration page is divided into two parts: a patient
examination data list and a patient examination information. The
patient examination information portion can be further divided into
two parts: patient information and examination information.
1 - Patient examination list: Displays patient data in a list for reg-
istering.
2 - Patient information area: When the patient registers, he/she
needs to fill in the corresponding information. After filling in the
requirements, you can pre-register or start the exam.
3 - Patient examination information area: Fill in the appropriate
inspection information.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-15 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.3.1 Patient examination data list

The patient examination data list area provides a list of three patient
examination data: a work list, a list of examination patients, and a
list of pre-registered patients, which can be switched by clicking on
the tab, see Fig 4-15.

Fig. 4-15 Patient examination data list

Displaying the data in the work list requires the configuration of the
work list server. The examination patient list and the pre-registered
patient list are all displayed in the local database and do not need to
be configured separately.
The patient can be selected from the work list, the examination list or
the pre-registration list, and the New Exam button can be selected
to load the patient data into the patient examination information area
for pre-registration or to start the examination.
Data list display condition: The user can input conditions in the data
display condition area of each table to find and display the specified
data content.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-16 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Data display conditions for patient list and pre-registered patient list
have been checked, see Fig 4-16.

Fig. 4-16 Examed patient condition list

Display conditions of worklist data: see Fig 4-17.

Fig. 4-17 Display conditions of the worklist data

After the user selects a patient examination data, the button in the
function button area provides the function supported by the data.
Only the inspection records of the examined patients support addi-
tional examinations. Please refer to the Chapter 4.3.2.3 Additional
examinationabout the additional examination.

4.3.2 Patient examination information

The data in the patient information area is divided into mandatory
information and optional information. The optional information may
not be filled in for patient examination and pre-registration. The data
in the examination information area is all required data. The user
completes the input of the required data item and passes the system
data verification. The PreRregist and Start Exam buttons are high-
lighted, and the next step can be performed: performing pre-regis-
tration or starting the scan, see Fig 4-18.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-17 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-18 Patient registration

NOTE When the input data cannot pass the system

check, the PreRegist and Start Exam buttons
remain grayed out and prompt for modification
until the data passes the check. The user can
click the Clear button to restore the page data to
the initialization state and re-enter.

4.3.2.1 Patient preregist

In the patient examination information input and selection data, or
select a record through the patient examination data list, select the
PreRegist button to perform pre-registration. The system saves the
patient's pre-registration record to the database and displays it in the
pre-registration list.
When selecting data from the patient examination data list, if the
record is selected from the work list and the examination patient list,
the system uses the data of the patient information, and needs to
complete the examination information data and the missing patient

NPD-MRI-1301 4-18 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

information before pre-registration; When you select a record in the

registration list, the system will use all the registered patient infor-
mation and examination information, and prompt whether to create a
new pre-registration record, you can follow the prompts.

Fig. 4-19 Pre-registration records already exists

If the record is selected from the patient examination data list and
the patient's name, gender, birthday, etc. are modified and pre-reg-
istered, all data in the system that numbered the patient will be guar-
anteed to ensure unique matching of the patient number to the
patient. All make the same changes.

NOTE If the modified patient has a completed examina-

tion record in the system, the patient informa-
tion modification cannot be performed on the
patient registration page, which needs to be
completed by the editing function on the patient
management page, see Chapter 4.2.4.4 Recycle Bin
management.

4.3.2.2 Patient registration examination

In the patient examination information input and selection data, you
can also select a record from the patient check data list, select Start
Exam, the system will save the patient's test record to the database.
When selecting data from the patient examination data list, if the
record is selected from the work list and the examination patient list,
the system will use the patient information data, and the user needs
to complete the examination information data and the missing
patient information before starting the examination; When you select
a record in the registration list, the system uses all of the registered
patient information and exam information.
At the same time, only one patient can be examined until the patient
has finished the examination. After the check is over, the new data is
displayed in the checked list.
If we choose the record from the patient's examination data list and
modify the patient's name, gender, birthday and so on, we will start

NPD-MRI-1301 4-19 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

scanning. To ensure that the patient's number matches the patient's

uniqueness, all data used in the system will be modified in the same
way.

NOTE If the modified patient has a completed examina-

tion record in the system, the patient informa-
tion modification cannot be performed on the
patient registration page, which needs to be
completed by the editing function on the patient
management page, see Chapter 4.2.4.4 Recycle Bin
management.

4.3.2.3 Additional examination

You can append examinations on the records that have been
checked. The images of the appending examination are saved in the
previous examination record as a supplement to the previous exami-
nation.
When appending an examination, the record of the examination list is
selected from the data list, and the Additional Exam button is high-
lighted. When the button is clicked, the data is loaded into the patient
examination list area. The patient information and the examination
information cannot be modified. The previous examination data is
directly used, and the Start Exam button is clicked to start the addi-
tional examination.

NOTE After the additional examination is started, the

examination can be added again until the patient
finishes the examination.

NOTE After the additional examination is completed, a

new examination record is generated in the
examination list, and only the end time of the
exam is updated.

4.4 Patient examination

After registering the patient, click Start Exam to enter the patient
examination page, see Fig 4-20.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-20 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

1 3

2 4 5
7

Fig. 4-20 Patient examination page

Table 4-3 Area description

No. Description

1 Patient information area

2 Sequence information area

3 Positioning area

4 Scan queue area

5 Parameter editing area

6 Parameter conflict area

7 Command panel

4.4.1 Patient information

The following information is displayed in the patient information dis-
play area:
- Name
- ID
- Gender

NPD-MRI-1301 4-21 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Birthday
- Age
- Patient weight
- Examination information
- Positioning information
SED information display area: Display SED value information.

4.4.2 Sequence information

The following information is displayed in the sequence information
display area:
- Sequence name
- TR
- TE
- Thickness
- Pixel Size (horizontal, vertical)
- SAR value and mode
- dB/dt value and mode
- B1+RMS: the B1+RMS value is an indication of the strength of
the RF field.
The color of the SAR value and the dB/dt value varies depending on
the controlled mode:
• The SAR value is white and the SAR mode is the normal operation
mode.
• The SAR value is yellow, and the SAR mode is the first-level con-
trolled operation mode.
• The SAR value is red, and the SAR mode is the second-level con-
trolled mode.
• The dB/dt value is white and the dB/dt mode is normal operation
mode.
• The dB/dt value is yellow, and the dB/dt mode is the first-level
controlled mode.
• The dB/dt value is red, and the dB/dt mode is the second-level
controlled mode.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-22 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.4.3 Positioning
The positioning area includes three positioning windows, which are
the left, middle and right positioning windows, as shown in Fig 4-21. E
ach positioning window can display a set of positioning images inde-
pendently.

Fig. 4-21 Positioning area

The positioning tools that can be displayed in the window are:
- Stack
- Slab
The operation of the positioning tool is:
- Pan
- Rotate
- Edge change
Each positioning tool has two states: checked and unchecked.

4.4.3.1 Stack
Stack is the area to be scanned currently, and the unselected state is
a narrow border, see Fig 4-22.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-23 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-22 Unselected and selected

When selected, the stack has an actionable handle, as shown in Fig 4-

22. Click the handle to rotate the current positioning stack by

dragging the mouse; the yellow border of the positioning stack is
used to change the edge, and the positioning frame size can be
changed; the rest of the positioning block is used to translate the
positioning stack, and the positioning stack can be panned by drag-
ging with the mouse.

4.4.3.2 Slab
Slab is an image area that does not need to be displayed at present.
When it is not selected, the pre-saturated band is displayed as a
green narrow border; when selected, it will become a green thick
border, as shown in Fig 4-23.
After selection, slab has an actionable handle, as shown in Fig 4-23.
The green line in the middle of the slab is used to rotate the current
slab. After the mouse clicks on the handle, it can be rotated by drag-
ging and dropping the mouse. The yellow border is used to change
the edge, and you can change the size of the slab by dragging with

NPD-MRI-1301 4-24 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

the mouse. The rest of the green part of the slab can be panned by
mouse dragging.

Fig. 4-23 Unselected and selected

4.4.4 Scan queue

The scan queue display area contains all the sequences scanned by
the patient as well as sequence scans, edits and applications, and
end examination commands, see Fig 4-24.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-25 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-24 Scan queue

Table 4-4 Identification description

No edit Editing Edited

Parameter conflict Patient table move or Scanning

scan prepare

Reconstructing Failed Imaging part failed

Imaging completed Pause SAR,dB/dt excess

ECG or peripheral gat- White, ingected contrast Start manually

ing agent

Dynamic scan or batch Autovoice Respiratory garing

Prepare injection of con- Green, sequence White, not scanned

trast agent affected by contrast agent

Green, scanned Brainquant sequence

NPD-MRI-1301 4-26 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.4.4.1 Scan sequence right-click menu

Fig. 4-25 Right click menu

The right-click menu includes the following features:
• Pause: Sequences that are unedited, edited, and conflicting states
can be paused, and sequences of other states can only be viewed.
• Manual Start: Sequences that have not been edited, edited, and
conflicting states can be started manually, and sequences of other
states can only be viewed.
• Injection Contrast: Contrast information can be set for sequences
that are not edited, edited, and conflicting, and sequences of other
states can only be viewed.
• Save As: Save the selected sequence to the specified location.
• Insert Comment: Comments can be inserted into sequences that
are not edited, edited, edited, and conflicting.
• Delete: Sequences that have not been edited, edited, and con-
flicted states can be deleted.
• Reset: Parameter resets can be made to the sequence being
edited.
• Send to 2D: The scanned sequence can be sent to 2D.
• Move to Top, Next, Previous and Move to Bottom: Sequences that
have not been edited, edited, and conflicted states can be changed

NPD-MRI-1301 4-27 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

in position; or dragged to the specified location with the left mouse

button.

4.4.4.2 Scan
The edited sequence in the scan queue is below the sequence of scan
completion (scanned, failed completely, partially failed, imaged suc-
cessfully, and reconstructed) or the first in the scan queue, enabling
the start of the scan. After pressing the Scan button, the scanning is
performed according to the sequence, and the scanning, rebuilding,
and scanning (or complete failure, partial failure, and imaging suc-
cess) are displayed.

4.4.4.3 End Exam

A scanning sequence or a reconstructed sequence exists in the scan
queue, and the termination scan can be performed. After the com-
mand is executed, the sequence status changes to a complete failure
or a partial failure depending on the scan.

4.4.4.4 Edit / Apply

If the selected sequence is in the unedited, edited, and conflicting
state, you can execute the edit sequence command. After executing
the command, the state of the sequence changes to the editing state.
The selected sequence is in the edit state and can execute the appli-
cation command. If there is no parameter conflict after executing the
command, the status of the sequence changes to edited; if there is a
conflict, the status of the sequence changes to the conflict state.

4.4.5 Parameter editing area

The parameter editing area includes Protocol, Routine, Geometry,
Contrast, Acquisition, System, Expand and Service page.

4.4.5.1 Protocol page

The protocol page includes part, organ, strategy and sequence infor-
mation see Fig 4-26.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-28 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-26 Protocol page

4.4.5.2 Routine page

Fig. 4-27 Routine page

In the Routine page, you can adjust the follwoing parameters:

NPD-MRI-1301 4-29 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- FOV
- Percent
- Hor*Ver
- Thickness
- Gap
- Stacks
- Slices
- Total Slices
- Orientation
- Phase Dir.
- Matrix
- Percent
- Hor*Ver
- TR Optimize
- TE
- TE2
- ETL
- Echo Spacing
- Tse Coding Order
- Averages

NPD-MRI-1301 4-30 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.4.5.3 Geometry page

Fig. 4-28 Geometry page

You can adjust the following parameters in the Common page:
- FOV
- Percent
- Hor*Ver
- Phase Dir.
- Scoutview Offset
- Stacks
- Active#
- Orientation
- Slices
- Parallel
- Total Slices
- Thickness
- Gap
- Recon.Slice
- Recon.Thickness

NPD-MRI-1301 4-31 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Matrix
- Percent
- Hor*Ver
- Recon.
- Pixel size
- Hor*Ver
You can adjust the following parameters in Saturation page:
- Slabs
- Active#
- Dual Slab
You can adjust the following parameters in Batch page:
- Mode
- Interval
- Stacks
- Interleave Scan

4.4.5.4 Contrast page

Fig. 4-29 Common page

You can adjust the following parameter in Common page:

NPD-MRI-1301 4-32 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- TR Optimize
- TE
- TE2
- ETL
- Echo Spacing
- TSE Coding Order
- Flip Angle
- Refocusing Angle
- ROKAR TEequiv.
- Filter
You can adjust the following parameter in PreparationPulses page:
- TI1
- Optimize TI
- TI2
- IR Preparation
- T2 Preparation
- T2 prep.Time
- Black Blood Pulse
- Black Blood TI
- MTC
- ASL TR
You can adjust the following parameters in FatSuppression page:
- Fat Saturation
- Flip Angle
- Auto
- SPAIR
- PROSET
You can adjust the following parameters in DynamicImaging page:
- Mode
- Interval
- Frames
- Keyhole

NPD-MRI-1301 4-33 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Time/Frame
- Dynamic Subtraction

4.4.5.5 Acquisition page

Fig. 4-30 Common page

You can adjust the following parameters in Common page:
- Averages
- Average Mode
- Reverse Slices
- Acquisition
- Display
- Fold Over Suppression
- Phase
- Slice
- BW Optimization
- [Hz/Pixel]
- Elliptical Encoding
- Half Scan
- Dual Half Scan

NPD-MRI-1301 4-34 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Asymmetric Spin Echo

- CENTRA
- Partial Echo
- SENSE Mode
- Phase Factor
- Slice Factor
- MAS
- EPI Reverse Phase
You can adjust the following parameters in Angio page:
- TOF
• Parallel REST
• Chunks
• Slices Per.Chunk
• TONE
- PCA
• Interleave Levels
• Isotropic
• Uniform VENC
• Direction
You can adjust the following parameters in Diffusion page:
- Directions
- Unidirection
- Overplus
- B-Value

NPD-MRI-1301 4-35 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.4.5.6 System page

Fig. 4-31 Gating page

You can adjust the following parameters in Gating page:
- Efficicency
- Window
- Respiratory Gating
• Delay
• Speed-up Factor
- Cardiac Gating
• Delay
• PEG Factor
• Beats in TR
- Peripheral Pulse Gating
• Delay
• PEG Factor
• Beats in TR
You can adjust the following parameters in AutomaticVoice page:
- Language
- Before Scan

NPD-MRI-1301 4-36 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

You can adjust the following parameters in Precalibration page:

- Frequency Adjustment
- Tx Gain Adjustment
- Volume Shimming
- Coil Position Detecting
- SofTone
- Recevier Attenuation
- Composite Adjustment
- CSM Acquisition
- Close All Adjustment
In the Coil page in System you can see Fig 4-32.

2 3

Fig. 4-32 Coil page

Area 1: The position and name of the available cell group for the cur-
rent fixed coil are displayed, and the cell group can be selected as
needed.
Area 2: The case where four slots (LH, RH, LF, RF) are inserted into
the non-stationary coil is displayed, and the name of the inserted
non-stationary coil and the name of the unit group of the coil are dis-
played.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-37 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Area 3: Displays the name of the QBC coil and the name of the unit
group. The user can select and deselect the coil unit group.
You can adjust the following parameter in PatientTable page:
- Mode
- Position
- Overlap Width

4.4.5.7 Expand page

Fig. 4-33 Expand page

You can adjust the following parameters in Expand page:
- Phase Image
- Gradient Distortion Correction
- Motion Correction
- Reconstruction Filter
- Phase Direction
- Read Direction
- Flow Compsensation
- ROKAR Percentage
- EPI Segment

NPD-MRI-1301 4-38 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Hardpulse
- AIM
- SeriesSplit

4.4.5.8 Service page

Fig. 4-34 Service page

You can adjust the following parameters in Service page:
- Scalig Mode
- Factor
- Value
- Homogeneity Correction
- Field Aperture
- Predefined
- Raw Data
- Radial Scan Projections
- ORICMB
- SWI
- SWIM

NPD-MRI-1301 4-39 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- MRETST
- Automatic Gain
- Gain Value
- EPIMOD
- KFILTX
- KFILTY
- KFILTZ
- PFMETX
- PFMETY
- GRGFCT
- GLRCSM
- RESFRE

4.4.6 Parameter conflict display

The parameter conflict display area displays the conflict level and

description information, as shown in Fig 4-35. Click and display

all the information, as shown in Figure 4-36.

Fig. 4-35 Parameter conflict area

Fig. 4-36 Show detal information

Conflicts are divided into three levels: errors, warnings, and informa-
tion.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-40 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.4.7 Command panel

The command panel contains the following commands:

:Scout Line Tools.

:Protocol Lib.

:ParEditor.

:Gating.

4.5 Image viewing and post processing

The user can select a study record in the patient examination list
area, or a series recoLird, click the corresponding post-processing
function in the image function processing entry, or right-click the
item in the right-click menu to directly load the selected image series
into Image browsing page for image viewing and processing.

4.5.1 2D
The 2D display interface allows you to view and manipulate one or
more sequence data, and view images in different sequence layouts
and image layouts. You can switch the selection mode, flip, sort, and
batch the image, and use common tools to zoom in and mark the
image.
In the patient examination list area of the patient management page,
select a study record, or a Series record, and click 2D in the image
processing function, see Fig 4-37.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-41 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5 4

Fig. 4-37 Image viewing

Table 4-5
No. Description

1 Menu bar

2 Image thumbnail

3 Image display area

4 Utility panel

5 general tool panel

4.5.1.1 Menu bar

The system menu bar provides different post-processing application
options such as 2D display, multi-planar reconstruction (MPR), 3D
reconstruction and DWI, see Fig 4-38.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-42 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-38 Menu bar

4.5.1.2 Patient image thumbnail

Import Image
Double-click on the selected patient image to import the image. The thumbnail
border of the currently imported image is highlighted, see Fig 4-39.

Fig. 4-39 Import image

Image information display
Right click on the selected patient thumbnail to display information
about the image sequence, see Fig 4-40.

Fig. 4-40 Image information

Patient information display
Right click on the patient sequence list to display patient information
above the patient sequence list, see Fig 4-41.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-43 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-41 Patient information

4.5.1.3 Image display area

In the image display area, the system can display two-dimensional
images in a routine row and column arrangement, and the layout is
arbitrarily arranged from 1 * 1 to 10 * 10. Click the button on the
left side of the thumbnail to change the image display area to the
enlarged display state; click the button again to return to the original
state.
menu
Right click in the image display area, pop-up window menu, including
common operations on images:

- and : Select. Features include restoring the mouse to

its initial state, deselecting graphics tools, zooming and pan-
ning, and more.

- and : Pan. Move the selected image anywhere in its

window.

- and : Zoom in/out. Zoom in and select a point on the

image. Drag the mouse down to zoom out. Drag the mouse up
to zoom in. A message will pop up when the input value is out-
side the legal range: Please confirm that the entered number is
between 0 and 10.

- and : Rotate. Select an arbitrary point on the image,

drag the mouse up and down, and the image follows the direc-
tion of mouse movement.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-44 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- and : Modify window width window position. Press

and hold the left button on the image: slide the mouse to the
right to increase the window width; slide to the left to decrease
the window width; slide up to increase the window level; slide
to down to decrease the window level.

- :Send to Film, send the selected image to the print inter-

face.

- :Send to Report, send the selected image to the report

interface.
- ROI: Define the area of interest, features include:

• or in the drop down list of general tool

panel : Rectangle. Rectangular area measurement
and annotation tool, which can measure the relevant
data (area, average, maximum, minimum, mean
square error, signal to noise ratio) of the scanned part
in the rectangular area. Select a point on the selected
image, click as a vertex of the rectangle, and drag the
mouse to draw a rectangular area. When the mouse is
raised, the rectangular area is drawn.

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Oval. The elliptical area measurement labeling
tool measures the data of the scanned area in the ellip-
tical area. Select a point on the selected image, click as
a vertex of the ellipse, then drag and drop to draw the
ellipse area. When the mouse is raised, the ellipse area
is drawn.

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Text. Select a point on the selected image, click
to bring up the text box, and enter text in the text box.

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Arrow. Select a point on the selected image, click
as the starting point of the label arrow, and then drag
it. When the mouse is raised, the label arrow ends. At
this point, a text box appears, allowing you to enter
text.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-45 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Line. The measurement length dimensioning tool
measures the length of the scanned portion of the line
mark. Select a point on the selected image, click as the
starting point of the line, then drag the mouse to draw
a line, and when the mouse is raised, the line ends.

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Polyline. The length measuring tool measures the
length of the scanned portion of the broken line mark.
Select a point on the selected image, click as the start-
ing point of the polyline, then drag the mouse to draw
the polyline, and when the mouse is raised, the line
ends.

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Angle. Select a point on the selected image, click
as the vertex of the angle, move the mouse, and click
to draw an edge of the angle; then move the mouse,
then click to draw the other side of the angle.

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Pixel value. Click on the image to get a pixel
report (gray value, coordinate value, distance from the
center of the magnet) at the green cross.

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Gray scale. You can measure the contour infor-
mation (such as length, maximum, minimum, mean
square error, etc.) of the area inwhich it is identified.
Select a point on the selected image, click as the start-
ing point of the contour line, then drag the mouse, and
when the mouse clicks again, the measurement ends.

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Eliptical histogram. Select a point on the selected
image, click as a vertex of the ellipse, and then drag
the mouse to draw the ellipse area. When the mouse is
raised, the ellipse area is drawn and the histogram is
displayed.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-46 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• or in the drop down list of general tool panel

: Rectangular histogram. Select a point on the
selected image, click as a vertex of the rectangle, and
then drag the mouse to draw the rectangle area. When
the mouse is raised, the rectangle area is drawn and
the histogram is displayed.
- Display: You can choose to show/hide text direction, 3D direc-
tion, ruler and grayscale bars.
- Window: You can choose to switch between normal and full
screen modes.
- Reset Image: Resets the selected image to the state it was in
when it was loaded.
- Diplay Location Line: Display the location line.
- Display Surview Image: Display the sruview image.
- Trim the whole series: Use with the 2D tool crop in the tool pal-
ette to copy the cut to the entire sequence.
- Copy annotations to series: Use with the ROI in the Window
menu to copy the label to the entire sequence.
- Paste Annotation: Paste the annotation to the series.
- Delete All Annotation: Delete all annotation.

4.5.1.4 General tool

The general tool panel is divided into: 2D Tool, Calculation, Denoise,
Batch Tool and General Tool, see Fig 4-42.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-47 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-42 General tool panel & 2D Tool

4.5.1.4.1 2D tool
2D tool includes Series Compare, Image Layout, Flip&Layout , Select
Mode, and Shutter, see Fig 4-43.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-48 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-43 2D tools

- Series Compare: After loading the image series, each image will
be displayed in tiled form, and each image series will be sorted
one by one. Five layout modes are provided, which are sequen-
tially switched from left to right into 1*1, 1*2, 2*1, 2*2 and
1*3 series layouts.
- Image Layout: Five arrangements are available for displaying
images in the image area. From left to right, there are 1*1,
2*2, 3*3, 4*4 and customize.
- Flip & Rotate:

• : Horizontally flip the image.

• : Vertically flip the image.

• : Rotate the image clockwise.

• : Rotate the image counterclockwise.

- Select Mode:

• : Select a single image for page flipping, zooming,

panning, and changing window width or window level.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-49 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• : Select a set of images for page flipping, zooming,

panning, and changing window widths or window lev-
els.

• : Select the entire window for page flipping, zoom-

ing, panning, and changing the window width or win-
dow level.

- Crop: There are three kinds of cropping methods: circle ,

rectangle and polygon. You can choose to crop the area

outside the graph and keep the image in the area.

4.5.1.4.2 Caculation

Fig. 4-44 Caculation

The system provides three calculation methods: ADC, ADD, SUB.
• ADC: Select the DWI high B value and zero B value image
sequence. Click the button and the system generates an ADC
map, which is displayed on the home page and thumbnail panel.

• ADD/SUB: Select two images, click the / button, the sys-

tem automatically recalculates, and a new image sequence is gen-
erated, which is displayed in the home page and thumbnail panel.

- : Filter, click on different filter buttons, and the image

will be displayed according to the corresponding display mode.

- : Image mapping, automatically maps multiple images

together.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-50 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- : Select the sequence you want to perform the positioning

operation, click any positioning button, the system will generate
a new positioning image and add it to the home page and
thumbnail panel for display.

- : Set the LUT. Select a different LUT display mode, and the
image is displayed in pseudo color in the selected mode.

4.5.1.4.3 Denoise

: Image noise reduction with coefficients from 0.00 to 1.00, see

Fig 4-45.

Fig. 4-45 Denoise

4.5.1.4.4 Batch tool

Batch tool includes Batch Select and Play:

Fig. 4-46 Batch tool

- Batch Select

NPD-MRI-1301 4-51 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• : Define the starting image in batch images.

• : Define the ending image in batch images.

• : Select all images in a batch image.

• : Clear the defined starting and ending images.

- Play: With the playback tool, you can play a defined batch or
play all the images you load. You can use the following func-
tion:

• : Positive sequence play mode.

• : Reverse play mode.

• : Single step forward mode.

• : View images in single step backward mode.

• : Pause play and adjust play speed.

- Batch:

• : Send batch images to the film.

• : Send batch images to the report.

• : Save the processed images.

4.5.1.5 General tool

The general tool panel contains a variety of common tools for image
post-processing scenarios such as 2D, MPR, 3D, and DWI. The
repeat function has been introduced in the window menu. The follow-
ing are the unique features of the general tool panel:

- : Enhance and smooth. Click this function, when the cursor

shape changes to then select a point on the image, drag

the mouse up and down, and the image follows the mouse
movement to change the degree of smoothing and sharpening.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-52 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- : Inverse. After selecting the image, tap this function and

the image will be displayed in reverse color.

- : Grid. Click to add a grid to the selected image.

- : Modify the WW/WL. Set the window width and window

level of the image. Right click on the button and press the
default button to automatically match. The WW/WL can be cus-
tomized by pressing the custom button. When the input value is
outside the legal range, the window width will pop up a mes-
sage: Please confirm that the entered number is between 1 and
65535. The window will pop up a message: Please confirm that
the number entered is between -32768 and 32767.

- : Image information. A left-click button will hide or display

image abbreviated information; a right-click will appear or

the former is image abbreviated information, and the latter

is image detail information that can be sent to the film.

- : Zoom in. Zoom in (the default state is small window)

image window, press again to resume.

- : Reset image. Resets the selected image to the state it was

in when it was loaded.

- : Reset all. Reset all images to the state they were in when
loaded.

4.5.1.6 T1 dynamic enhanced analysis

Click the ROI button, after drawing the ROI on the image, click the
Calculate button, and the corresponding ROI curve and calculation
result will be displayed in the image display area, as shown in Fig 4-
47.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-53 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-47 T1 dynamic enhanced analysis

4.5.2 MPR
MPR (Multi-planar reformatting) is specially used for multi-planar
reconstruction of images. The main functions are as follows: image
visualization, image thickness rendering, CPR, definition and editing
of oblique line/batch processing, image playback, annotation, Report
and print functions.
In the patient examination list area of the patient management page,
select a study record, or a series record, and click MPR in the image
processing function entry to enter, see Fig 4-48.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-54 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

图像显示区 工具面板

Fig. 4-48 MPR

4.5.2.1 Image display area

MPR interface image display area can display 4 kinds of images at the
same time in 2*2 layout: transverse image (upper left), coronal
image (upper right), oblique/curved image (bottom left) and sagittal
image (bottom right), see Fig 4-49.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-55 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Transverse area Coronal area

Oblique/Curve area Sagittal area

Fig. 4-49 Image display

There are four modes to choose from in the lower left corner of the
transverse, coronal and sagittal images:
- 2D: Click on the 2D option to display the original scanned
image.
- MinIP: Click on the MinIP option to display a thickness MinIP
image.
- AIP: Click on the AIP option to display a thickness AIP image.
- MIP: Click on the MIP option to display a thickness MIP image.
In the case of thickness display, modify the thickness of the layer in
the following three ways: modify the layer thickness value in the four
corner information, or click the up and down arrow of the layer thick-
ness edit box, or adjust the layer thickness slider (below the window,
the mouse is over the selected state to be visible).
Right-click in the image area to display the right-click menu with the
following functions:
- Select: The function is selected in the same general tool panel.
- Pan: The function is panned in the same general tool panel.
- Zoom: The function is zoom in and out in the same general tool
panel.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-56 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Rotate: Click to select an image, and the function rotates in

the same general tool panel.
- Modify the WW/WL: The function is the same as the general
tool panel.
- Send to Film: The function is the same as the general tool
panel.
- Send to Report: The function is the same as the general tool
panel.
- ROI: The function is the same as the ROI in the general tool
panel.
- Display: The function is the same as the display in the 2D dis-
play interface.
- Window: You can choose to switch between normal and full
screen modes.
- Reset Image: The image can be restored to the initial loading
status.
- Fusion: Two images can be blended and displayed, along with
related tools such as angle measurement.

4.5.2.2 MPR tool panel

According to the function of image processing, the tool panel can be
divided into three parts: MPR tool, Batch tool, Compare tool, see
Fig 4-50.

Fig. 4-50 Tool panel

4.5.2.2.1 MPR tool

NPD-MRI-1301 4-57 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-51 MPR tool

- Changing the image display layout: Image display layout. You
can switch between 3+1, 2*2, and 1*2 by clicking the Display
Layout button in the operation panel.
- MPR Tool: Used to adjust the display information on the
image, click the button on the front to select or cancel it.
• Crosshair: Click to show/hide the crosshairs.
• Zoom Sync: Zoom on any window, and all other win-
dows are adjusted synchronously.
• Reference Line: After drawing the center curve of the
curve reconstruction on the image, click Reference Line
to show/hide the path.
• WL Sync: Adjust WL/WW for any window, and all other
windows are adjusted synchronously.
• Reference Image: Click to position the oblique/curve
positioning thumbnail in the upper right corner of the
oblique/curve reconstruction image.
• Thickness Sync: Change the drawing mode to MIP or
AIP or MinIP, adjust the thickness for any one window,
and adjust the other two windows simultaneously.
- Oblique tool:
Define Oblique: It is used to create a chamfered view of a
certain angle, which is beneficial to observe the spatial rela-
tionship between the lesion and the surrounding tissue.
Method of operation:

NPD-MRI-1301 4-58 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• Select the MPR image on either side and click the

Define Oblique button. The system automatically
defines a oblique line on the MPR image. When fin-
ished, the corresponding image is displayed in the
image display area of the lower left corner chamfer/
surface reconstruction.
• Drag and drop the line to change the image in real
time.
- Curve tool:
Define Curve: It is used to generate curved surface images,
which is beneficial to observe the spatial relationship
between the lesion and the surrounding tissue. Click to trace
the curve to produce a surface map.
Method of operation:
• Click the Define Curve button to click on any image in
the three section display area.
• A control point is displayed in the image. When the sec-
ond positioning point is clicked, the mouse continues to
find the next positioning point. When the last position-
ing point is clicked, the mouse is determined by double
clicking. When finished, the surface map is displayed in
the bevel/surface reconstruction image display area.
• Release the mouse to end the operation.
- Move the crosshair:
The cross reference line can be translated and rotated axi-
ally. Multi-angle beveled view obtained by rotating the refer-
ence line.
Method of operation:
• Pan: Move the mouse closer to the intersection, and
drag the mouse to pan the guide.
• Rotate: Place the mouse at the far end of the reference
line and drag the mouse to rotate the guide line axially.

4.5.2.2.2 Batch tool

Batch tool includes define batch, modify batch and play batch, see
Fig 4-52.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-59 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-52 Batch tool

- Define Batch steps:
a. Go to the MPR Batch sub-page, in the transverse display
area (or the coronal display area or the sagittal display
area), click on the area to select one of the images displayed
(scroll the mouse wheel, or move the reference line), or click
the left mouse button to scroll through the images).
b. Click the Horizontal Batch/ Vertical Batch or Define
Oblique Batch button to set the starting image position for
play.
c. After dragging the mouse to move the desired range, release
the mouse to display the playback range and the ending
image position.
d. Click the Multi button to draw multiple batches on the
image.

NOTE Batch thickness synchronization: If this box is

checked, the thickness of the batch image will be
the same as the spacing when the spacing is
modified. When the batch image thickness is
modified, the pitch information does not change.

NOTE When you define a batch, a green batch range

line is displayed in the middle.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-60 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NOTE After defining the batch, click the Delete button

on the keyboard to delete the batch.

NOTE Once the batch is defined, the batch can be saved

as a protocol template, or the template can be
applied to other sequences. Features include:
add, apply, and delete. The contents of the batch
protocol include: batch spacing, number of
batches, window to define batches, location
information for batch processing, batch window
drawing mode, thickness, and WL/WW.

- Define CPR Batch:

• Go to the CPR Batch sub-page, first draw a CPR curve,
and then click the Define Batch button to generate a
CPR batch. You can modify the parameters in the spac-
ing and quantity boxes below to adjust the CPR batch.
- Modify batch: Commonly used modification functions are as
follows:

• : Define horizontal/vertical batch processing.

• : Define oblique batch.

• Preset: Add, apply, and delete protocol templates.
• Spacing: Used to set the spacing value when playing
the image, in mm.
• Quantity: Used to set the number of images played in
the selected range, which is manually input or auto-
matically generated according to the spacing value, dif-
ferent from the original image number (Note: the
spacing and image number are associated, one of
which is set After that, the other will be generated
automatically).
- Play batch: See 2D post-processing batch playback function
introduction.

4.5.2.2.3 Compare tool

NPD-MRI-1301 4-61 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-53 Compare tool

- Click on any of the layout buttons in the compare tool (including
1*2, 2*1, 1*3, and 2*2 layouts) to enter the compare mode.
- Double-click on the sequence of images to be compared and the
image is automatically loaded into the layout.
- Select Lock to synchronize between the comparison images,
including scaling, page turning, and so on.
- The user can select different axial (transverse, coronal or sagit-
tal) images for comparison.
- When the user selects the layout in the non-comparison tool,
the system automatically exits the comparison mode.

NOTE Oblique, curve and batch images do not support

comparison.

4.5.3 3D viewer
The 3D reconstruction interface can reconstruct the image in 3D,
including image visualization, image cutting and bone removal, pro-
tocol editing, tissue segmentation and management, and image play.
In the patient examination list area of the patient management page,
select a study record, or a Series record, and click 3D in the image
processing entry, see Fig 4-54.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-62 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-54 3D viewer interface

4.5.3.1 Image display area

The image display of the 3D display interface is divided into two
parts: a sectional image display area and 3D image display area, see
Fig 4-54.
Section image display area: including sagittal display area (lower
left), coronal display area (left middle), transverse display area
(upper left), each image display area has two perpendicular inter-
secting lines, representing different Positioning plane.
3D image display area: used to display the results of 3D reconstruc-
tion.

4.5.3.2 Tool panel

The 3D reconstruction tool panel consists of visual tool, tissue man-
agement tool, batch tool, slab tool, and compare tool, see Fig 4-55.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-63 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-55 3D Tool panel

4.5.3.2.1 Visual tool

Fig. 4-56 Visual tool

- Visual tool:
• Crosshair: Show/hide the crosshair.
• 3D Clip Box: Show/hide the clip box.
• MPR Clip Box: Show/hide the MPR clip box.
• Cube: Show/hide the cubic box.
- Display direction:

• : The 3D image display area displays an image in a

transverse direction.

• : The 3D image display area displays an image in a

coronal direction.

• : The 3D image display area displays an image in a sagittal

direction.

• : The 3D image display area is flipped at 180°.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-64 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Image display layout: The image display layout can be switched

between 3+1 and 2*2 by the image display in the operation
panel.
- Protocol edit:

Fig. 4-57 Protocol edit

• : Protocol edit. Used to show/hide the list of rebuild

protocols. After clicking Protocol, the mode selection
list will appear on the right side of the image display
area. You can select the appropriate protocol group in
the drop-down menu at the top of the list to display the
set of protocols. After double-clicking on a protocol, the
image in the 3D display area will be displayed accord-
ing to the settings of the protocol.

• : Add. Add a new rebuild protocol to the mode

selection list. After clicking, the protocol editing dialog
box appears, in which different organ structures can be
observed by setting and adjusting different opacity,
pixel values, color tables and illumination. When the
cursor stays at the control point, the shape of the cur-
sor changes to a crosshair, and the position of the con-
trol point can be adjusted by holding down the mouse
and dragging, thereby changing the opacity of the area
near the control point. You can add control points by
double-clicking on the opacity curve. The mouse is
placed on the opacity curve and the curve can be
moved.

• : Edit. Custom protocols can be edited.

• : Delete. Custom protocols can be deleted.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-65 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NOTE You cannot edit and modify the default tissue

protocol in the system.

- 3D display mode: 3D display modes include SSD, MinIP, AIP,

MIP and VR.
• SSD: Shade Surface Display, click this button to per-
form surface reconstruction operation, and the result is
displayed in the 3D image display area. Click SSD in
the Visual tool panel and click to set the SSD color,
see Fig 4-58.

Fig. 4-58 SSD mode

• MinIP: Minimum Intensity Projection, click this button
to perform the MinIP, and the result is displayed in the
3D image display area, see Fig 4-59.

Fig. 4-59 MinIP mode

• AIP: Average Intensity Projection, click this button to
perform the AIP, and the result is displayed in the 3D
image display area, see Fig 4-60

NPD-MRI-1301 4-66 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-60 AIP mode

• MIP: Maximum Intensity Projection, click this button to
perform the MIP, and the result is displayed in the 3D
image display area, see Fig 4-61.

Fig. 4-61 MIP mode

• VR: VR reconstruction or Volume Rendering, click this
button to switch between SSD/MinIP/AIP/MIP and VR
reconstruction directly.

4.5.3.2.2 Tissue management tool

The tissue management tool includes the tissue list and the tissue
operation tool. The operation section includes threshold setting, dye-
ing, erasing, and revision operations, see Fig 4-62.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-67 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-62 Tissue management tool

- Tissue list: lncludes Name, MPR, Show and Volume. You can
add, delete, rename, and clean up lists.
- Tissue management opration:
• Opacity: Set the opacity of the VR image display.
• Tissue Color: Right-click on the organization list and
click to define the organization color.
• Monochrome display: Right click on the organization list
and click to display the organization.
- Cut: Tissue cutting. Select to cut the 3D reconstructed image.
The include cut and exclude cut can be done.
• Opreation steps:
1. Click .
2. Click to start the cutting operation in the 3D image display
area, and move the mouse to draw the area to be cut.
3. Click again and the area drawn by the mouse in the image
is cut off.
4. The system will display a prompt asking if you want to
submit the cutting operation, click the OK button to start the
cutting operation. Click the Cancel button to cancel the cut-
ting operation, and the 3D display image will return to the
state before this cutting.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-68 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• Multiple tissue cutting operations can be performed on

one image.
• Undo cut: The operation corresponding to the cutting
operation cancels the operation and restores the sys-
tem to the state before the cutting operation. Click the
button and the 3D image display area is restored to
the state before this operation.

NOTE This operation is only available for the 3D image

display area.

- Segment:

• Threshold setting: Click to see the maximum and

minimum thresholds of the desired area selected for
segmentation tool.

• Dye: Set the volume value of the area growth in ,

or select the desired dose value among the system's

default three volumes (low, medium, high). Click to

select the organization you want to extract on the MPR
image.

• Brush: Select the desired radius size from the

default three radii (small, medium, large). Click to
select the tissue you want to stain on the MPR image.

• Eraser: Select the desired radius size from the

default three radii (small, medium, large). Click to

select the organization you want to erase on the MPR
image.

• : Contour segmentation. Draw the contour on dif-

ferent MPR layer and segment the contour region.

• : Fill. Click the icon to make the dyed area fully

dyed.

• : Expand. Click the icon to expand the dyed area.

• : Erode: Click the icon to decrease the edge of the

dyed area.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-69 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.5.3.2.3 Batch tool

The batch tool is divided into two definition methods: quick definition
and general definition. The defined batch image can be batch pro-
cessed and sent to film, batch processing to report, save batch or
play.
- Quick Define: Input the rotation angle and the number of
images that need to be batched. Click the rotation direction
button to generate a batch image, as shown in Fig 4-63.

Fig. 4-63 Quick define

- Common Define: Enter the number of images that need to be
batched, set the start and end points of the batch, set multiple
endpoints, and click the play button to generate a batch image.
In the location list, right click on a certain location to delete the
location; clear button to clear the location list, as shown in
Fig 4-64.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-70 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-64 Common define

4.5.3.2.4 Slab tool

The Slab is to cut 3D images through two three-dimensional planes,

which are parallel to each other and can be rotated and moved arbi-
trarily to achieve the effect of cutting 3D images in a specified direc-
tion and position.

Fig. 4-65 Slab tool

- Slab: Perform a Slab operation on the VR image to display the
image after the operation.
- Parallel to screen: Adjust the mode of Slab to parallel screen
mode.
- Sigle clip plane: Switch two planes to a single plane.
- The user can adjust the slider to modify the thickness of the
Slab.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-71 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.5.3.2.5 Compare tool

Fig. 4-66 Compare tool

Steps:
a. Click on any of the layout buttons in the compare tool to
enter the comparison mode.
b. Double-click on the sequence of images to be compared and
the image is automatically loaded into the layout.

c. Check to synchronize between the comparison images,

including zoom, rotation, and window width.
d. Users can choose different layout buttons according to their
needs.
e. When the user selects a layout other than Compare tool, the
system automatically exits the comparison mode.

4.5.3.2.6 Right-click menu

Click the right mouse button to display the context menu:

- : Select. Select this option to click on a point on the 3D

image. The intersection of the crosshair on the MPR image will
be positioned at the corresponding position. On the MPR image,
drag the left button to browse the image.

- : Pan. Function in the same general tool .

- : Zoom. Function in the same general tool .

- : Roate. Click to rotate the image, function in the same gen-

eral tool .

- : Modify window width and level: Function in the same gen-

eral tool .

NPD-MRI-1301 4-72 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- : Send to film.

- : Send to report.
- ROI: The function is the same as the annotation tool in the
common tool. Text, arrow, line, and angle can be drawn on the
VR image.
- Image quality: The quality of the VR image can be set.
- Window: Transverse, coronal, sagittal, and VR image window
positions can be exchanged.

4.5.4 Diffusion weighted imaging

Referred to as DWI, the ADC map is generated by weighting the
magnetic resonance diffusion images of different B values, and the
ADC index values in the ADC map are obtained.
In the patient examination list area of the patient management page,
select a study record, or a series record, click on any button in the
image processing function entry (2D, 3D or MPR) to enter the image
browsing and post-processing interface, click the DWI button on the
interface enters, see Fig 4-67.

Fig. 4-67 DWI interface

NPD-MRI-1301 4-73 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.5.4.1 Image display

In the image display area, a two-dimensional image can be displayed
in a row and column arrangement, and the display layout is arbi-
trarily arranged from 1*1 to 10*10. Right click in the image area to
display the right click menu function as follows:
- Select: The function is the same general tool panel Select.
- Pan: The function is the same general tool panel Pan.
- Zoom: Function is the same general tool panel Zoom.
- Roatate: Click to rotate the images, and the function is the
same as Rotate in the general tool panel.
- Modify window width and level: The function is the same gen-
eral tool panel Modify window width and level.
- Send to film: The function is the same general tool panel Send
to film.
- Send to report: The function is the same general tool panel
Send to report.
- ROI: The function is the same as the Annotation tool in the gen-
eral tool panel.
- Display: The function is the same as Display in the 2D display
interface.
- Window: You can choose to switch between normal and full
screen modes.
- Reset image: The image can be restored to the initial loading
state.
- Fusion: Two images can be blended and displayed, along with
related tools such as angle measurement.

4.5.4.2 Tool panel

The tool panel consists of 2D tools and calculation tools, depending
on the capabilities of the image.
For the functions of the 2D tool, please refer to Chapter 4.5.1.4.1 2D
tool.
The calculation tool has the following functions:

NPD-MRI-1301 4-74 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-68 Caculation tool

- Caculation Parameter, Caculation Index: The information
required for ADC calculations, click the front button to select or
cancel it.
- Target B value: Set the maximum and minimum thresholds for
the target B value (maximum can be set to 5000).
- ADC: Click this button, the system determines whether the DWI
image sequence has undergone ADC calculation or ISO-DWI
fusion processing, and checks the legality of the image data
(including a B value equal to zero, and B values in three differ-
ent directions are the same and both are greater than zero).
DWI automatically registers to generate ADC maps, ISO-DWI
fused images, eADC images, and c-DWI fused images.

4.5.5 Functional magnetic resonance imaging

Functional magnetic resonance imaging analysis mainly determines
the location of various functional areas in the brain and the degree of
response to various stimuli through blood oxygen saturation level
detection (BOLD). The main functions include image loading and dis-
play. Setting and adjustment of data test mode, setting and adjust-
ment of other parameters, fusion display of Map and anatomical
images, etc.
In the patient examination list area of the patient management page,
select a study record, or a series record, click on any button in the
image processing function entry (2D, 3D or MPR) to enter the image

NPD-MRI-1301 4-75 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

browsing and post-processing interface, click the button to enter

the interface, see Fig 4-69.

Fig. 4-69 BOLD interface

WARNING! Carefully check the merged area and keep the

original image.

WARNING! The fused images must be in the same plane.

4.5.5.1 Tool panel

The BOLD Tools panel consists of visual tool, BOLD analysis parame-
ter settings, and fusion setting.

4.5.5.1.1 Visual tool

NPD-MRI-1301 4-76 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-70 Visual tool

- Image layout: Click the image layout button to switch.
- Change Volume: The Volume image of the image display area
can be switched by inputting the Volume number or by clicking
the toggle button.

4.5.5.1.2 BOLD analysis parameter settings

Fig. 4-71 BOLD analysis parameter setting tool

- Click the Mode Settings button to expand the mode setting
panel to set the BOLD analysis mode.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-77 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-72 Set BOLD analysis mode

- Preprocessing setting:
• Time correction: After checking, the time correction
processing is performed during BOLD analysis.
• Motion Correction: After checking, perform motion cor-
rection processing during BOLD analysis.
• Space smoothing: After checking, spatial smoothing is
performed during BOLD analysis.
• High-pass filtering: After checking, high-pass filtering is
performed during BOLD analysis.
- Analysis mode setting: Set the analysis mode to define rest and
non-resting tasks for the analysis mode.
- BOLD Analysis:
After setting the BOLD analysis parameters, click BOLD
Analysis, and the system calculates the BOLD map fusion
image based on the analysis parameter settings, see Fig 4-
73.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-78 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-73 BOLD map fusion image

By plotting the ROI on the BOLD Map fused image, you can
get the time signal curve of the region of interest, see Fig 4-
74.

Fig. 4-74 Time signal curve of the region of interest

4.5.5.1.3 Fusion setting tool

NPD-MRI-1301 4-79 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

In the Fusion setting tool panel, you can set the Set LUT, Fusion
Coefficient, and Map threshold coefficient. The fusion effect display
can be switched through the T Map mode, see Fig 4-75.

Fig. 4-75 Fusion setting

4.5.6 Image splice

Image Splicing mainly automatically segments the segmentally
scanned MRI images into a continuous, complete image. In the
patient examination list area of the patient management page, select
the C-spine, L-spine, and T-spine sequence images of the same
patient, and click any button (2D, 3D, or MPR) in the image process-
ing function entry to enter the image browsing and Post-processing

interface, click the button on the interface to enter, see Fig 4-76.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-80 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-76 Image splice interface

4.5.6.1 Tool panel

- 2D tool: support switching layers, click First Layer, Upper Level,
Next Level, Last Level to page through the images.
- Manual splice: After you select Enable manual splicing, you can
manually splice the image.
- Target area: You can select the Upper Level and Next Level
images.
- Slight adjustment: Moves the selected image up, down, left,
right, clockwise, counterclockwise, and so on.
- Calculate: The image can be re-spliced to the manually
adjusted position, or the chef status of the automatic stitching
can be restored, or the image can be erased.

4.6 Advanced clinical function

4.6.1 BrainQuant
The two FA scans are performed in one sequence. The scanning pro-
cess does not require artificial pauses and interventions in the mid-
dle, and is a true one-click scan. Making full use of the shared

NPD-MRI-1301 4-81 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

information of multiple contrasts to reduce the total scan time, four

weighted images, four quantitative images and two venous blood
vessel images can be obtained quickly and stably.

4.6.1.1 Data acquisition

As shown in Fig 4-77 and Fig 4-78 is the parameter editing dialog of
BrainQuant. Load the BrainQuant sequence, edit the BrainQuant pro-
tocol and click Apply to save the edited protocol. Click Scan to start
the BrainQuant sequence scan.

Fig. 4-77

Fig. 4-78
The amplitude and phase data corresponding to the sequence col-
lected data are post-processed to obtain a variety of images: T1
weighted, proton density weighted, T1 weighted enhancement, T2*
weighted cerebrospinal fluid suppression and other contrast images,
T1 map, PD map, QSM, R2* map and other quantitative images, as
well as two vessel images SWI and tSWI. See Fig 4-79 and Fig 4-80.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-82 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-79

Fig. 4-80

NPD-MRI-1301 4-83 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.6.2 MRS
MRS (Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy) is a method for determining
the molecular composition and spatial distribution by using the chem-
ical shift phenomenon in magnetic resonance. It is a non-invasive
new technique for studying the metabolism, biological changes and
quantitative analysis of compounds in living organs.

4.6.2.1 Data acquisition

1. Select the MRS protocol of the scan card;
2. Scan the corresponding sequence in turn: Scoutview and Press;
3. The PRESS sequence will jump out of the optimization box for selection dur-
ing scanning, select the most appropriate ones in turn, and click OK to con-
tinue execution.

4.6.2.2 Post processing

1. After the PRESS scan is finished, select the sequence generated on
the homepage, click the 2D button on the right to enter the image
processing page, and click the button at the top right of the page
to enter the MRS post-processing interface, see Fig 4-81.

Fig. 4-81 MRS interface

NPD-MRI-1301 4-84 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2. On the MRS tool panel, the curve data is processed in the following
list order.
3. After the data output is processed, click Save As*.BMP to save the
corresponding image.

4.6.3 BOLD fmri

BOLD fmri is a non-invasive imaging method for exploring brain cog-
nitive functions and dysfunction diseases. With its advantages of
safe, non-radiative, non-invasive and high resolution of time (sec-
onds of magnitude) and spatial (millimeter), fMRI is widely used in
clinical research in cognitive neurology and degenerative diseases.
The basic principle of functional magnetic resonance imaging is that
the magnetic permeability of oxygenated hemogloBin and deoxyhe-
mogloBin is different. When the anaerobic oxygenated hemogloBin is
in an external magnetic field, it has little effect on the surrounding
magnetic field, while the paramagnetic deoxyhemogloBin causes the
original magnetic field distortion. The transverse relaxation time
(T2*) is reduced, the attenuation is accelerated, and the MRI signal is
lowered. When the brain tissue is excited, the increase of cerebral
blood flow in the local area causes the relative proportion of deoxyhe-
mogloBin in the blood to decrease, so it appears as a high signal on
the T2* weighted image. This method can indirectly reflect the neural
activity of the brain.

4.6.3.1 Data acquisition

1. Load Scoutview from the protocol and scan the positioning image.
2. Load the MPRAGE sequence from the protocol, enter the parame-
ter fmrict in the parameter editor, and set the value to 1. Set TE =
3.6, reverse time = 1000, flip angle = 8. After the scan recon-
struction is successful, the brain MPRAGE image should have a
clear gray-white contrast.
3. Load the EPI sequence. In the orientation of the General page,
select SAG to be the phase direction A-P. During positioning, the
positioning frame is adjusted in the sagittal display frame so that
the phase encoding direction is parallel to the AC-PC and the num-
ber of layers is set to 20. In the mode of the Compare page, the
dynamic imaging mode is set to continuous and the number of
frames is set to 100. In order to reduce the interlayer effect, it is
best to set up a compartment scan.
4. Load the EPI sequence. On the Compare page, set TR = 3, TE =
50, echo interval = 1.0, flip angle = 90; on the geometry page,
matrix size = 64 x 64, slice thickness = 6, pitch = 6 , the number

NPD-MRI-1301 4-85 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

of slice = 27 (to cover the whole brain); in the Compare page,

select the fat suppression item; on the Acquisition page, close SE
NSE; in the Extended page reconstruction filter, select no recon-
struction filter. The scan reconstruction was successful, and 100
whole brain dynamic EPI images were obtained. The total number
of layers was 27x100 = 2700 images.

4.6.3.2 Post processing

On the image browsing page, select multiple EPI sequences and
MPRAGE images to enter BOLD post-processing.

Fig. 4-82 BOLD post processing

1. In the visual tool, you can choose from a variety of image layouts.
2. Click Switch Volume, switch the currently displayed Volume
image by entering the Volume number or clicking the Switch but-
ton to switch to the first Volume.
3. Click the Mode Setting button to expand the mode setting panel:
- Pre-processing: time correction, motion correction, spatial
smoothing, high-pass filtering;
- Stimulus time input: Click "+" after the mode name, enter the
stimulation time information, task: Rest, start Volume: 1, con-
tinue Volume: 10; click "+" again, task: Active, start Volume:
11, continuous Volume: 20 ; repeatedly click "+" until you enter
all time information;

NPD-MRI-1301 4-86 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- After completing the BOLD analysis parameter settings, click

BOLD Analysis to perform post-processing operations.
4. After the operation ends, the display interface displays the brain
activation image results. Adjust the fusion coefficient, select the
map threshold coefficient, and select T Map positive selection.
5. Click the MPRAGE image in the lower left corner of the BOLD dis-
play interface to display the fusion of the functional image and the
structural image, and superimpose the low-resolution brain activa-
tion result on the high-resolution structural image.

4.6.4 DTI
Diffusion tensor imaging is a new method of descriBing brain struc-
ture and is a special form of MRI imaging. For example, if MRI imag-
ing is to trace hydrogen atoms in water molecules, diffusion tensor
imaging is based on the direction of movement of water molecules.
Diffusion tensor imaging (presentation different from previous
images) can reveal how brain tumors affect nerve cell connections
and guide medical personnel to brain surgery. It can also reveal sub-
tle anomalies associated with stroke, multiple sclerosis, schizophre-
nia, and dyslexia.

4.6.4.1 Data acquisition

1. DTI data acquisition is multi-directional, Multi-B value, DW
sequence acquisition. Multi direction is controlled by DW sequence
interleave. Multiple B-values are controlled using DynamicLevel for
dynamic scanning. For example, three b values in 16 directions,
plus the image with B = 0, then the dynamic level = 3, interleave
= 17, and finally 17 *3 = 51 images are produced for each layer.
2. In the Acquisition page, select the current sequence, click Edit,
click Diffusion at the bottom of the dialog box on the right, and
display the dialog box for diffusion related settings, as shown in
Fig 4-83. DWI and DTI share an interface for diffusion settings. The
diffusion setting page provides the number of directions, the num-
ber of B values, the superimposition mode, and the B value input.
- Directions: Only 3, 6, 16, 24, 32 options are available. Select 3
for DWI scanning and others for DTI scanning. The interface
only provides the setting of the number of directions. The spe-
cific direction setting is determined by the code. At the same
time, a scan with a B value of 0 is automatically added in the
calculation.
- Number of B values: Only integers of 1-12 can be entered. B
value range: 0 < B value ≤ 10000.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-87 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Overlplus mode: When the overlay mode is selected, the num-

ber of directions is automatically set to 3, that is, the DWI scan
is performed, and the gray direction is set.

Fig. 4-83 Diffusion interface

4.6.4.2 Post processing

At the image processing entry of the patient management page, click
DTI to enter the DTI post-processing.
After importing the DTI data, click Perform to perform motion cor-
rection, as shown in Figure 4-84.

Fig. 4-84 Whether to perform motion correction

After the motion correction is completed, click on the function bar

and wait for the data pre-processing to complete the fiber bundle
tracking page, as shown in Fig 4-85.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-88 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-85 Fiber bundle tracking page

The display module is used for image layering to display or hide the
cut surface; the fiber tracking module is used for tracking and dis-
playing the fiber.
Fiber tracking process:
1. First, sketch an ROI for fiber tracking: Click the New button on the
fiber tracking page, and drag a closed curve on the coronal, sagit-
tal or transverse window by the left mouse button to perform ROI
delineation. Click the OK button after the sketch is completed.
2. After slightly adjusting the minimum length of the fiber, the long-
est length, the maximum angle, the minimum FA, the maximum
FA and the tracking step, click the Start Tracking button to track
the white matter fiber bundle passing through the ROI. After delin-
eating multiple ROIs, the fiber bundle logic module is also used to
perform logical processing on the fiber bundles of different ROIs.
3. If you want to adjust the display of the fiber, switch to the fiber
display page. By adjusting the tensor ellipsoid model to the
tracked ROI, the fiber tensor ellipsoid model that has passed
through the ROI can be displayed. The tensor model size and
report can also be adjusted.
The corresponding ROI (Fibers) is selected, and the cluster fiber can
also be displayed and adjusted. You can choose whether it is visible,
color scheme (single color or fill by direction) and fiber bundle display

NPD-MRI-1301 4-89 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

scheme (linear or tubular). When you select a single color, you can
also click the Change Color button to specify the color of the cluster
fiber bundle.

4.6.5 SWI and SWIM

SWI (Susceptibility weighted imaging) is a high-resolution, three-
dimensional gradient echo, full-speed compensation MRI technique.
The Susceptibility weighted imaging mapping (SWIM) is based on
SWI technology. Modify the SWI phase data to produce a digital map
that reflects the difference in local magnetic sensitivity.

4.6.5.1 Data acquisition

Find the 3D SWI sequence under Head/Neusoft, the Service page, as
shown in Fig 4-86. If "None" is selected in the "SWI" drop-down box,
the "SWIM" drop-down box is grayed out, and the scan result has no
SWI and SWIM images; if "SWI" drop-down box selects "Default" or
"Strong", the scan will generate the corresponding strength. SWI and
SWIM images. A drop-down list of corresponding patients on the
home page will generate three sets of images: Original, SWI, and
SWIM images.

Fig. 4-86 SWI

NPD-MRI-1301 4-90 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-87 Generate three sets of images

4.6.6 PWI (DSC)

There are three main methods for magnetic resonance measurement
perfusion, Dynamic Susceptibility Contrast-Enhanced MRI (DSC-
MRI), Dynamic Contrast Enhanced MRI (DCE-MRI), and Arterial Spin
Mark Imaging ( Arterial Spin Labeling MRI: ASL-MRI).
DSC-MRI is the most commonly used perfusion weighted imaging in
clinical practice. It is the gold standard for magnetic resonance cere-
bral perfusion imaging at present, and has high clinical value in brain
tumors and cerebral ischemic diseases.
DSC-MRI is a contrast-tracking inspection technique that uses an
exogenous tracer (usually a chelating chelate) to enter the cerebral
blood vessels after intravenous and cardiac and lung circulation,
using T2 and T2* weighting. Rapid magnetic resonance imaging
dynamically monitors changes in signals to measure brain perfusion
status. Gadolinium chelate is a paramagnetic tracer. Its presence will
cause local magnetic field disturbance, dephasing the spins of the
protons, thereby reducing the T2 or T2 * of the tissue, causing a
decline in signal. By monitoring the signal of the part of interest over
time, according to a certain mathematical operation, calculate a vari-
ety of perfusion parameters, such as Cerebral blood flow (CBF), Mean
transit time (MTT), Cerebral blood volulme (CBV), and so on.
Common perfusion parameters are as follows:
- Time to Peak (TTP): The time interval from the start of the
tracer injection (or the tracer arrives at the tissue) to the great-
est loss of signal in the region of interest. It is mainly used to
determine the blockage of blood supply artery or Willis ring.
- Cerebral Blood Volume (CBV): Given the blood content in brain
tissue, the unit is ml/100g. It can be used to assess vasodila-
tion, hyperplasia, and determine stroke areas.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-91 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

- Cerebral Blood Flow (CBF): The blood content in the brain tis-
sue per unit time is expressed in ml/100/min. It can be used for
tumor grading and to evaluate hemodynamics under occlusion
of the blood supply artery.
- Mean Transit Time (MTT): The average residence time of the
tracer as it flows through the brain tissue. It can be used to
assess the core area of the stroke and provide hemodynamic
information such as brain adaptation.
- Time of Arrival (T0): The time from the start of the tracer injec-
tion to the time when the brain tissue signal begins to change.

4.6.6.1 Data acquisition

DSC data acquisition steps:
1. Loading the Scoutview from the protocol;
2. Loading a DSC sequence from the protocol;
3. Open the parameter editor, set the parameter pwidsc to true, set the epiwar
to 3, and start scanning.

Fig. 4-88 DSC related parameter settings

4.6.6.2 Post processing

The DSC post-processing steps are:
1. Click the PWI (DSC) function entry in the image processing func-
tion entry on the Patient Management page.
2. The post-processing workflow contains the selection AIF and the
calculation of CBF, CBV, MTT, T0, TTP maps.
The motion correction operation is the same as DTI. DSC processing
Before calculating the image, you need to select AIF, click the Select

NPD-MRI-1301 4-92 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

AIF button in the calculation module, and a white square box will
appear in the actual window. Press and hold the middle mouse button
inside the box to drag it to the arterial position. The AIF curve of all
voxels (7x7) in the box can be displayed, see Fig 4-89.

Fig. 4-89 AIF curve

1. You can select the curve by double-clicking the left mouse button
inside the eligible curve square (blank area outside the curve).
After selecting multiple districts and counties, click the OK button,
and the average value of the selected curve will be used as the AIF
for the next calculation.
2. After the AIF selection is completed, the CBF, CBV, MTT, T0 and
TTP buttons enter the available state, and the corresponding but-
ton is selected to obtain the map in the image display area. If you
want to switch a picture to a pseudo color display, use the C but-
ton at the top of the display window.

3. Click the button to display the time signal curve in each ROI in
the Source graph. If you hover your mouse over a data point of
the time signal curve, you can also get the specific time (in sec-
onds) and image signal of the point.

4.6.7 ASL
ASL (Arterial Spin Labeling), based on the theoretical hypothesis that
the tracer can diffuse freely from the blood vessels to the space of

NPD-MRI-1301 4-93 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

tissues, using magnetic labeled arterial water protons to flow into the
imaging layer and reduce the signal generated by tissue exchange to
for imaging, and performs subtracting analysis on the images before
and after the labeling.

4.6.7.1 Data acquisition

Scanning steps:
1. Select ASL protocol from the scancard;
2. Scan the sequence: Scoutview and ASL sequences;
3. ASL sequence parameter setting: TR is set to 4000ms, check Opti-
mize, Inversion TI1 is set to 1800ms, IR Preparation selects ASL,
Frames is set to 60, and scanning is performed.

4.6.8 CS MRA and CS MRCP

MR imaging is restricted by Nyquist sampling theorem and main
magnetic field strength. The imaging speed of MRI is very slow,
which greatly limits the application of MRI in clinical practice. Com-
pressed sensing technology can achieve better reconstruction results
by regularizing the sparsity of images in a certain mathematical field.
The CS MRA, CS MRCP method provides a fast convergence algorithm
to solve the compressed sensing problem. CS MRA, CS MRCP can
achieve better reconstructed image effects with higher SENSE accel-
eration multiples.
The SFSS reconstruction method is used to improve the reconstruc-
tion effect of the high acceleration multiple SENSE, so that the MRCP
can achieve the original SENSE reconstruction effect and accelerate
in the case of high acceleration multiple SENSE.

4.6.8.1 Data acquisition

CS MRA data acquistion: select New TOF 3D MRA TONE SFSS
sequence and start scan, see Fig 4-90.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-94 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-90 New TOF 3D MRA TONE SFSS sequence

CS MRCP data acquisition: select 3D MRCP TSE Gated SFSS sequence
and start scan, see Fig 4-91.

Fig. 4-91 3D MRCP TSE Gated SFSS sequence

4.6.9 Smart BrainQuant

Smart BrainQuant is based on BrainQuant, which fully exploits and
utilizes the common information in sequence acquisition to improve
the scanning speed and achieve a faster one-scan than BrainQuant to
obtain a three-dimensional image with at least 10 contrast ratios.

4.6.9.1 Steps
When scanning the BrainQuant sequence, select AIM under the
parameter interface Expand, see Fig 4-92.
NPD-MRI-1301 4-95 User Interface
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-92 Select AIM

4.6.10SmartEnhance DWI
SmartEnhance DWI improves the signal-to-noise ratio of the head
DWI image. The traditional method is to increase the image signal-
to-noise ratio by increasing the average number of scans. SmartE
nhance DWI can achieve a large signal-to-noise ratio with a small
average number of times, thus reducing the scan time.

4.6.10.1Steps
When scanning the DWI sequence, select AIM under the parameter
interface Expand, see Fig 4-92.

4.6.11Smart HDDWI
Smart HDDWI is a high-resolution multi-shot DWI imaging method.
Compared with clinically widely used single-shot images, its imaging
has higher spatial resolution, better signal-to-noise ratio, and Greatly
reduce the deformation of single-shot DWI images. Compared to the
traditional multi-shot DWI imaging method, Smart HDDWI can
achieve better image quality with fewer acquisition times, and the
reconstruction speed is greatly improved while reducing the scanning
time.
Smart HDDWI realizes the mapping from multiple single-shot DWI
images to multi-shot DWI images. It has obvious advantages in high-
resolution, low-deformation and other multi-shot DWI images. The
image quality under low acquisition times is reduced, while the acqui-
sition time and reconstruction time are reduced.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-96 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.6.11.1Steps
When scanning HDDWI sequences, AIM is selected by default, see
Fig 4-92.

4.6.12Clear Thrive
Clear Thrive is an abdominal Thrive imaging sequence with assisted
noise reduction technology that enhances the image quality of the
abdomen Thrive sequence.

4.6.12.1Steps
When scanning the Thrive sequence, select AIM under the Expand
page of the parameter interface, see Fig 4-92.

4.6.13SmartEnhance DFFE
Abdominal DFFE sequences may generate Gibbs artifacts and ampli-
fied noise due to the use of partial acquisition and parallel imaging
techniques, especially due to the patient's respiratory movement,
which also produces residual aliasing artifacts. SmartEnhance DFFE
not only greatly eliminates Gibbs artifacts in the abdominal DFFE
sequence, but also suppresses residual aliasing artifacts.

4.6.13.1Steps
When scanning the DFFE sequence, select AIM on the Expand page
of the parameter interface, see Fig 4-92.

4.7 Film printing

In the patient examination list area of the patient management page,
select a study record, or a Series record, and click on Film Print in
the image processing entry.
The film layout editor includes an information bar, a display window,
a tool panel, and a general tool, which can be used to edit, type, and
print the target image.

4.7.1 Information bar

The information bar includes patient information, number of film
pages, current page image count, and total number of images. Click
on any of the page icons to view the current page content.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-97 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.7.2 Tool panel

The tool panel includes Layout, Print, Select Mode and Edit.

4.7.2.1 Layout

4.7.2.1.1 Page

Fig. 4-93 Page

Standard 1*1: Display a singel image.
Standard 2*2: The images are displayed in an arrangement of 2
columns and 2 rows.
Standard 4*5: The images are displayed in an arrangement of 4
columns and 5 rows.
Standard 5*7: The images are displayed in an arrangement of 5
columns and 7 rows.
Other: Select from the 14 other standard layouts or a custom layout.
Once you have selected the desired layout, the current film layout
will automatically change accordingly. Select Set as Default Layout
to set the selected layout as the default film layout. Or select Delete
to delete the layout from the list.
Custom Split Page: Customize the number of rows and columns of
the page layout according to standard methods, row mode, and col-
umn mode.
Save Page Layout: Save the currently displayed page layout to the
custom layout list.
Apply to All Pages: Selecting this will change the layout of all film
pages at the same time; if this option is not selected, only the layout
of the current film page will be changed.

4.7.2.1.2 Cell

NPD-MRI-1301 4-98 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 4-94 Cell

Split Cell: Four standard formats are provided to split the cells.
Custom Split Cell: Select the cell, click Custom Split Cell on the
tool panel, enter the number of rows and columns, and the selected
cells will be split. Multiple cells can be selected for splitting at the
same time.
ComBine Cell: Select the cells you want to merge, click Combien cell
on the tool panel, and the selected cells will be comBined into one
cell.

4.7.2.1.3 Display

Used to switch between single-page and multi-page layouts.

Fig. 4-95 Display

1*1: The image display area displays 1 page of film.
1*2: The image display area displays 2 pages of film.
1*3: The image display area displays 3 pages of film.
2*2: The image display area displays 4 pages of film.
2*4: The image display area displays 8 pages of film.
Custom: The number of film pages displayed by the image can be
defined, ranging from 1 x 1 to 10 x 10.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-99 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.7.3 Print

Fig. 4-96 Print

Select Printer: Used to switch the printer, the switched printer is
automatically saved as the default printer at the next startup.
Custom Print: Used to select a printer, set the page range, and the
number of copies.
Ordinary Print: Film printing using a normal printer.
Print Preview: Preview the film to be printed.
Page Setting: Set the film page size.
Print Queue: View and manage print queue and history.
Add Test Image: Select the test image from the list of test images
and add it to the film application.

4.7.4 Select mode

Fig. 4-97 Select mode

All: Select all images.
Page: Select all images on the same page.
Seires: Select all images in hte same series.
Cell: Select all images in the same cell format.
Reverse Selected: Cancel the current selection, and select all the
other unselected images.
Cancel Selected: Right click the Reverse Selected button and
select Cancel Selected to cancel the current selection.
NPD-MRI-1301 4-100 User Interface
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.7.5 Edit

4.7.5.1 Delete
Delete the selected: Delete the selected images.
Delete the Previous: Delete the image before the current image.
Delete the After: Delete the image after the current image.
Delete the Interval: Delete interval images.
Restore Last Deleted: Restore the previous deleted images. The
system can restore up to three steps back.
Delete other Pages: Delete the other pages, leaving only the cur-
rent page.
Delete current Page: Delete all the images on the current page.

4.7.5.2 Copy selected

Copy Selected: Select the image to be copied, click the Copy
Selected button, and the selected image will be copied at the end of
the film.

4.7.5.3 General tool

Open Document: Open the document list to select one document to
open or delete.
Save Document: Save all image states and page layouts in the cur-
rent film page as one document.
Setting: Used to add, modify, delete printers, store page settings,
and other settings.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-101 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.7.6 Right-click menu

Fig. 4-98 Right-click menu

Select: Select the current image.
Pan: Pan the selected image.
Zoom: Zoom in and out the selected image.
Rotate: Rotate the selected image.
Modify WW/WL Modify the window width and window level of the
selected graphic. Press and hold the left button on the image, move
the mouse, slide the window to the left to decrease the width of the
window, and to the right is larger than that; the value of the upward
sliding window becomes larger, and the downward sliding becomes
smaller.
Delete the Selected: Delete the currently selected image.
Copy selected: Copy the currently selected image.
Copy: Copy the selected image.
Cut: Cut the selected image.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-102 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Paste: Paste the copied or cut image to the specified location.

Swap: The cut image is swapped with the defined image.
ROI: Define the area of interest with the same functionality as the
ROI in the General Tools panel.
Display: Show/hide image information, text direction, ruler, gray-
scale bars, and positioning images.
Sort: Sort the image with the Image Number, Series ID, Slice Loca-
tion, Time, Name, Study ID, Series Number, Ascending and Descend-
ing.
Reset Selected: Reset the currently selected image.
Reset All: Reset all images.

4.8 Report
The report interface includes an information bar, a tool panel, and a
report area, and a report template editor tool.
You can send an image to a report by doing the following:
• Select the image and click Send to Report in the navigation bar.
• Select the image and click Send to Report in the right-click
menu.
When the imported images belong to different patients, multiple
report tabs are automatically generated. Tabs are named after the
name at the top of the interface.

4.8.1 Information bar

The information bar displays the patient information.
Open Report: Open an existing report. You can view existing reports
in the report list.
Save Report: Save an editable report to the list of reports.
Export Reoprt: Export reports to local, USB, CD or remote, where
only structured reports support saving to local and remote, and
saved structured reports can be reloaded into the reporting applica-
tion.
Setting: Import and export report templates and medical record
templates. And you can set the report to be automatically closed
after printing.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-103 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4.8.2 Tool panel

Add Report Page: Add a new report page.
Delete Report Page: Delete the current report page.
Print Preview: Before printing the report, you can preview the cur-
rent report and then print it.
Printer List: Select a printer from the printer list.
Report Template: Select a report template from the Report Tem-
plate list.
Report Template Edit: Edit a newe report template.
Image List: Display the images loaded into the report interface.
Double click the image to load it into the image dispaly region of the
report.

NOTE You can use the mouse to drag and drop images
from the image list to the image display area of
the report template.

NOTE You can delete images by using Delete on the

keyboard or by right-clicking.

Case: Select the corresponding affected part in the list.

Add: Add the current medical record description to the medical
record template.
Cover: Cover the medical record template with the current medical
record description.
Set: Create, modify, delete, and add medical record templates.
Finish Report: After modify the report, click this icon to finish the
report process and save the report.
Print: Print the current report.

4.8.3 Case template

The medical record template can be created, modified, or deleted
according to the needs of the hospital.
To create a new template:
1. Click the Set button, the Medical record management dialog box
opens.
2. Click Case Edit tab.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-104 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

3. Select Case folder in the Case Library box, and right click it.
4. Click Add in the right key menu. Name and save the case parts.
5. Right click the folder and click Add from the right key menu to
create a case template.
6. You need to manually enter Description and Suggestion, and click
Save.
7. The new case just added will be displayed in the Select All Case
tab of the Select Case tab. Click the right arrow to add it to Use
Case to use the case in the tool panel. For the same reason, click
the left arrow to remove it from Use Case , that is, the case will
not be seen in the case of the tool panel.
To modify a template:
1. Select a case template in the Case Edit list on the Tool panel.
2. Click the template in the Case Edit box.
3. In the case library, select the template you want to delete and
right click.
4. Click Delete in the right-click list and the template is deleted.
To delete a template:
1. Click the Set button. The Case Manage dialog box opens.
2. Click the Case Edit tab.
3. Select a template in the Case Library box, and right click it.
4. Click Delete in the right key menu.

4.8.4 General workflow of report

1. Send the images to Report.
2. Select Report and open the Report interface. The sent image is
automatically displayed in the Image List of the tool panel.
3. Select the desired report template in the Report Template drop-
down list in the tool panel. Patient information is automatically
populated into the report as set in the report template.
4. Select the image display area on the report and double-click the
image in Image List. The image is loaded onto the report display
area.
5. Enter the image description and diagnostics manually in the
report, or select the appropriate medical record template from the
Case drop-down list in the tool panel.
6. Save and confirm the report.
7. Select the printer to print the report.
NPD-MRI-1301 4-105 User Interface
Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NOTE Before printing the report, please make sure the

paper format is selected correctly.

4.8.5 Report template editor

The report template can be modified and saved according to the
needs of the hospital. Click Report Template Edit on the tool panel
to enter the report template editor. It consists of a menu bar, a tool-
bar, and an editing area.

4.8.5.1 Menu bar

Click File to open the list:
- New: Creat a new template.
- Open: Open a template.
- Save: Save the template.
- Save As: Save the template as a new one.
- Recent Files: Open the recent template list.
- Exit: Exit the Report Template Editor interface.
Click Edit to open the list:
- Select All: Select all objects.
- Unselect All: Cancel the selection of all objects.
- Delete All: Delete all objects.
- Move to Front: Move the selected object to the front layer.
- Move to Back: Move the selected object to the back layer.
Click Management to open the list:
- Page: Set the page size.
- Content: Management report field.
- Template: Open the Template Management.
Click Help to open the list:
- Restore Factory Setting: After clicking, the relevant settings are
restored to the factory state.
- About: Display report template editor information.

4.8.5.2 Tool bar

Stardard tool bar, refer to Chapter 4.8.5.1 Menu bar.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-106 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Draw toolbar:
- Rectangle: Draw a rectangle.
- Ellipse: Draw a ellipse.
- Line: Draw a line.
- Polyline: Draw a polyline.
- Text: Draw an area for text input.
- Image: Draw an area for image input.
- Table Area: Draw an area for table input.
- Font: Set the font of the object.
- Color: Set the color of the object.
- Layout Tool bar: Layout design for all text boxes, images, etc.
displayed in the report template.
• Align Left: Align the selected objects to the left side.
• Align Right: Align the selected objects to the right side.
• Align Top: Align the selected objects to the top.
• Align Bottom: Align the selected objects to the bottom.

NOTE All alignment operations are aligned with the

top/bottom/left/right borders of the selected
edit area border.

• Horizontal Center: Centers the selected object horizon-

tally relative to the editing area.
• Vertical Center: Centers the selected object vertically
relative to the editing area.
• Same Width: Set the other selected objects to the
same width as the last selected object.
• Same Height: Set the other selected objects to the
same height as the last selected object.
• Same Size: Make all selected objects equal in size.
• Horizontal Spacing Equal: Make the selected objects
the same horizontal spacing as the last two selected
object.
• Vertical Spacing Equal:Make the selected objects the
same vertical spacing as the last two selected object.
• Grid: Show/hide the grid of the editing area.

NPD-MRI-1301 4-107 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NPD-MRI-1301 4-108 User Interface

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 5 Receive Coils

5.1 An overview of the receive coils

According to the classification in the standard IEC60601-1, the
receive coils supplied of the NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance
imaging system are Class I equipment, Type B applied parts, ordinary
equipment.
The NeuMR 1.5T system is equipped with 10 coils:
• AIM NV
• AIM Spine
• AIM Torso
• AIM GP Flex M
• AIM GP Flex S
• AIM Loop Flex
• Breast Coil
• Knee Coil
• Shoulder Coil
• Head Coil
The AIM NV, the AIM Spine and the AIM Torso are standard coils, and
the other coils are optional coils. The clinical application parts of each
coil and coil combination are shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 The clinical application parts of each coil and coil combination
Coil name Clinical applicai-
ton

AIM NV Head (brain, pitu-

itary, craniocerebral
MRA), cervical

AIM Spine Spine (thoracic,

lumbar spine)

AIM NV Whole spine

AIM Spine

AIM Spine Body (chest, abdo-

AIM Torso men, pelvis), heart

NPD-MRI-1301 5-1 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 5-1 The clinical application parts of each coil and coil combination
Coil name Clinical applicai-
ton

AIM Spine Breast

AIM Loop Flex

AIM NV Whole body

AIM Spine
AIM Torso
AIM Torso

AIM Spine Abdominopelvic

AIM Torso
AIM Torso

AIM Spine Abdominopelvic

AIM Torso
AIM GP Flex M

AIM NV Coil Neck

AIM GP Flex M

AIM NV Neck
AIM GP Flex S

AIM Spine Hip

AIM GP Flex M

AIM Spine Prostate

AIM GP Flex S

Head Coil Head

Breast Coil Breast

Knee Coil Knee

Shoulder Coil Shoulder

AIM GP Flex M Ankle

AIM GP Flex S Elbow, wrist

NOTE The system configuration you purchased may dif-

fer from this manual. Please refer to the pur-
chase contract.

5.1.1 AIM NV
The AIM NV consists of the following components:
1. Guide groove

NPD-MRI-1301 5-2 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2. Coil base
3. Coil cover
4. Release handle
5. Coil plug
6. Mirror

Fig. 5-1 AIM NV

5.1.2 AIM Spine

The AIM Spine consists of the following components:
1. Coil body
2. Coil handle
3. Coil plug
4. Coil booster device
5. Guide groove

Fig. 5-2 AIM Spine

NPD-MRI-1301 5-3 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5.1.3 AIM Torso

The AIM Torso consists of the following components:
1. Coil body
2. Coil cable
3. Coil plug

Fig. 5-3 AIM Torso

5.1.4 AIM GP Flex M

The AIM GP Flex M consists of the following components:
1. Coil body
2. Coil cable
3. Coil plug

Fig. 5-4 AIM GP Flex M

NPD-MRI-1301 5-4 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5.1.5 AIM GP Flex S

The AIM GP Flex S consists of the following components:
1. Coil body
2. Coil cable
3. Coil plug

Fig. 5-5 AIM GP Flex S

5.1.6 AIM Loop Flex

The AIM Loop Flex consists of the following components:
1. Coil body
2. Coil cable
3. Coil plug

Fig. 5-6 AIM Loop Flex

NPD-MRI-1301 5-5 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5.1.7 Shoulder Coil

The Shoulder Coil consists of the following components:
1. Coil body
2. Coil cable
3. Coil plug
4. Coil base and mattress

Fig. 5-7 The set of Shoulder Coil

5.1.8 Breast Coil

The Breast Coil consists of the following components:
1. Coil body and Breast Coil mattress
2. Coil cable
3. Coil plug
4. Base support
5. Head support
6. Ramp mattress

NPD-MRI-1301 5-6 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-8 The set of Breast Coil

5.1.9 Knee Coil

The Knee Coil consists of the following components:
1. Coil body
2. Coil cable
3. Coil plug

Fig. 5-9 The set of Knee Coil

5.1.10Head Coil
The Head coil consists of the following components:
1. Coil body
2. Coil cable
3. Coil plug
4. Coil base

NPD-MRI-1301 5-7 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-10 The set of Head Coil

5.2 Use of the receive coils

5.2.1 Precautions
The MRI system is a complex product consisting of advanced technol-
ogy. Receive coils are main component of the system. If used incor-
rectly, it can cause serious damage to the system or personal injury
to the operator and /or the patient.
Patient safety and comfort are always the main concern during any
scanning procedure. Always follow proper safety, operating, and
maintenance procedures to ensure that the patient is never exposed
to any electrical or mechanical hazards that have the potential to
cause injury. The safety instructions in this section supplement are in
Chapter 2 Safety.
Stop using the receive coils immediately and contact the designated
and authorized customer service engineer if you encounter any of the
following conditions:
• Damage to the cables or connectors;
• Damage to the coil structure that result in exposure of the internal
components;
• Damage in any part of the system;
• Patients report any elevated heating or tingling sensations;
• Body fluid (blood, urine) infiltrate into the inside of receive coil;
• Cleaning solution enter the inside of the receive coil.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-8 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! The receive coils are made up of both electrical

and mechanical components. Service personnel
must have specialized factory training if the
receive coils are to be installed and maintained
in a safe operating condition. Therefore, only
properly trained and qualified personnel should
be authorized to service the coils.

WARNING! The operator must have specialized training for

understanding the principle of magnetic reso-
nance imaging and operation before using the
system. Operating the system by unauthorized
or unqualified persons is liable to cause personal
injury or device damage.

WARNING! The receive coils are not suitable for use in the
presence of flammable an esthetics in combina-
tion with air, oxygen, or nitrous oxide. Use of
these devices in combination presents an explo-
sive hazard.

WARNING! Avoid contact with the surface of the RF trans-

mitter coil on the patient's body or limbs, as this
may cause local overheating.

WARNING! Use a thermal resistance material or mattress to

prevent the connecting cable from coming into
direct contact with the patient, as this may
cause burns to the patient.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-9 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Avoid the formation of loops with RF receive

cables and ECG leads. Because the loops can
cause the cables to overheat, it will burn the
contact area of the patient’s skin.

WARNING! Please remove other coils that were not used for
scanning from the patient table.

WARNING! Make sure that the receive coil connection cable

has been removed from the cover before moving
the patient table to avoid damage to the unit due
to the pulling of the connection cable.

WARNING! The connecting cable of the receiving coil is

always placed on the patient’s table to avoid
squeezing and scratching the connecting cable
when moving the patient table.

NOTE Keep cables from forming loops and it may result

in coupling that will impact on the capability of
scan.

NOTE Do not use the receive coils in connection with

any other MRI equipment, and do not use coils
from any other imaging equipment with your
MRI system. If you use a non-compatible coil, it
can be damaged and/or damage other parts of
the imaging system.

5.2.2 Receive coils storage

The position of the coil is conveniently used. In general, it is recom-
mended to place the coil in the coil cabinet, and the coil cabinet is
place in the scanning room.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-10 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! The coil cabinet should be made of non-magnetic

and environmentally friendly materials, such as
copper nails and wooden materials.

5.2.3 Moving the receive coils

Before moving the receiving coil, make sure that the upper and lower
parts of the receive coil are tightly engaged; the coil with the locking
buckle must be locked. Wind the coil cable into a loop or in your
hand.

WARNING! Do not lift a receive coil with a removable upper

part by its upper part. The locks or latches
between the coil parts are not designed to sup-
port the weight of the coil base and can open.
This could allow parts of the coil to fall, which
may cause damage to the coil and/or personal
injury.

WARNING! Never turn the coil one side up or upside down.

If you do so, the upper part of the coil can fall
off, which will cause damage to the coil and/or
personal injury. Never drop the coil or any of its
parts onto any surface.

5.2.4 Mattress
The following guidelines are for using the mattress:
• Using the mattress should try to make the patients comfortable
and relaxed.
• Limit the motion of a patient’s interested region.
For the detailed use of the mattress, see Chapter 5.3 Connecting and
removing the receive coils.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-11 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5.3 Connecting and removing the receive coils

This section focuses on the connecting and removing steps for AIM
NV and AIM Spine.

5.3.1 Connect to the patient table

- Procedure for connecting the AIM Spine:
1. Align the guide groove notch of the AIM Spine with the guide
of the patient table protrusion, gently place the AIM Spine on
the patient table with the handle facing the end of the
patient table, see Fig 5-11.

Fig. 5-11
2. Push the AIM Spine toward the end of the table to dock the
groove of the handle booster with the protrusion on the
patient's table, see Fig 5-12.

Fig. 5-12
3. Press the handle down to the horizontal position and lock the
coil, see Fig 5-13.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-12 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-13
- Procedure for connecting the AIM NV:
1. Open the AIM NV dust cover on the patient table, gently
grasp the sides of the AIM NV base with both hands, and
insert the AIM NV obliquely into the socket on the patient
table in the direction indicated by the guide slot, see Fig 5-14.

Fig. 5-14
2. When the AIM NV cover is separated from the base, install
the AIM NV cover and mirror steps:
a. Place the upper cover of the AIM NV on the base, see Fig 5-
15.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-13 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-15
b. Push the upper cover of the AIM NV toward the table to lock, see
Fig 5-16.

Fig. 5-16
c. Mount the mirror on the top cover of the AIM NV, see Fig 5-17.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-14 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-17
3. Place the NV mattress, Spine mattress and table top mat-
tress - foot side, see Fig 5-18.

NOTE Do not move the coil by holding the upper cover

of the AIM NV, which may result in coil damage,
see Fig 5-18.

Fig. 5-18
4. When the AIM NV is connected, the AIM NV will partially
overlap with the AIM Spine, and the positional relationship of
the AIM NV must be maintained under the AIM Spine. Do not
place the AIM NV base first, then connect the AIM Spine,
which may cause damage to the coil.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-15 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5.3.2 Removing the receive coils

1. Remove the NV mattress, Spine mattress and table top mattress
from the patient table, see Fig 5-19.

Fig. 5-19
2. Hold the sides of the AIM NV base with both hands and lift the AIM
NV in the direction of the guide slot to separate it from the patient
table socket and remove the coil from the patient table, see Fig 5-
20.

Fig. 5-20
3. If you need to remove the AIM NV cover and mirror from the AIM
NV base, you can do the following:
a. Press the buckle at the back of the mirror to release the mir-
ror and lift it up, see Fig 5-21.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-16 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-21
b. Press the release handle on the upper cover of the coil to release the
upper cover of the AIM NV.
c. Gently push the AIM NV coil cover toward the magnet side along the
guide slot, lift up and remove the upper cover.
4. Pull up the AIM Spine coil handle and the booster will separate the
AIM Spine from the socket on the patient table. Push the AIM
Spine toward the magnet to completely separate it from the
patient table socket. When the guide groove notch of the spine coil
is aligned with the patient table, grasp the AIM Spine handles with
both hands to remove from the patient table, see Fig 5-22.

Fig. 5-22

NOTE Do not lift the coil by holding the top cover of the
AIM NV, see Fig 5-23, which may result in serious
damage to the coil.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-17 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-23

NOTE Never remove the AIM Spine without removing

the AIM NV . This operation will cause the coil to
be damaged, see Fig 5-24.

Fig. 5-24

5.4 Regular examination positioning

The position includes the position of the patient and the position of
the receive coils. Correct positioning is an important prerequisite for
ensuring image quality. Positioning requirements: the center position
of the patient examination site coincides with the center position of
the receive coil and coincides with the center position of the uniform
magnetic field. If the center of the patient’s scan position cannot be
placed in the center of the receive coil, the center of the patient’s

NPD-MRI-1301 5-18 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

examination site should coincide with the center of the uniform mag-
netic field.

5.4.1 Head and spine examination

Coils Preparation
Place the AIM Spine and AIM NV coil base on the patient table and
cover with mattresses, see Fig 5-25.

Fig. 5-25
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in head-first supine orien-
tation, with the head on the base of the AIM NV, Fig 5-26.

Fig. 5-26
2. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones or head sup-
port wedges are placed between the head and the AIM NV to
soundproof and fix the head. The patient holds the alarm ball, see
Fig 5-27.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-19 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-27
3. For the head and cervical spine examinations, the upper cover of
the AIM Spine should be attached to the base. Mount the mirror on
the upper cover of the AIM Spine to relieve the patient's claustro-
phobia. There is no need to connect the upper cover of the AIM
Spine for thoracic and lumbar spine examination, see Fig 5-28.

Fig. 5-28
4. Place the mattresses between the patient’s body and the patient’s
arms or legs to avoid skin contact, see Fig 5-29.

Fig. 5-29

NPD-MRI-1301 5-20 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5. Place the knee support under the patient's legs to make the
patient comfortable, see Fig 5-30.

Fig. 5-30
6. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.2 Head examination with Head Coil

Coil preparation
1. Remove the AIM NV from the patient table and place the AIM
Spine on the patient table. Cover the coil with the spine mat-
tresses L and M, see Fig 5-31.

Fig. 5-31
2. Place the base of the Head Coil in the position where the AIM NV is
removed and close to the AIM Spine. Place the mattress on the
base of the Head Coil, see Fig 5-32.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-21 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-32
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the table in head-first supine orientation,
with the head on the base of the Head Coil, see Fig 5-33.

Fig. 5-33
2. Push the Head Coil into the coil base to cover the patient’s head,
see Fig 5-34.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-22 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-34
3. Place head support wedges between the patient’s head and the
inside of the Head Coil to fix the patient head and allow the patient
to hold the alarm ball, see Fig 5-35.

Fig. 5-35
4. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-36.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-23 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-36
5. Place the mattresses between the patient’s body and the patient’s
arms or legs to avoid skin contact, see Fig 5-37.

Fig. 5-37
6. Place the knee support under the patient's legs to make the
patient comfortable, see Fig 5-38.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-24 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-38
7. Move the patient to an ISOCenter position.

5.4.3 Neck examination

Use AIM Spine with AIM NV in neck exmination.
Coil preparation
Place the AIM Spine and AIM NV base on the patient table and cover
with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-39.

Fig. 5-39
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in head-first supine orien-
tation, with the head on the base of the AIM NV, see Fig 5-40

NPD-MRI-1301 5-25 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-40
2. The patient needs to wear headphones or place head support
wedges between the head and the AIM NV to soundproof and fix
the head and allow the patient to hold the alarm ball, see Fig 5-41.

Fig. 5-41
3. Connect the upper cover of the AIM NV to the base, and mount the
mirror to the upper cover, see Fig 5-42.

Fig. 5-42

NPD-MRI-1301 5-26 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4. Depending on the patient’s size and scanning range, place the AIM
GP Flex M or L coil on the patient’s neck, and connect to the
patient table, see Fig 5-43.

Fig. 5-43
5. Attach the coil to the patient with straps, see Fig 5-44.

Fig. 5-44
6. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-45.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-27 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-45
7. Place the knee support under the patient's legs to make the
patient comfortable, see Fig 5-46.

Fig. 5-46
8. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.4 Body examination

Coil preparation
Place the AIM Spine Coil and AIM NV base on the patient table and
cover with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-47.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-28 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-47
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the table in head-first supine orientation,
with the head on the base of the AIM NV, see Fig 5-48.

Fig. 5-48
2. For cardiac imaging, place the electrodes and connect the leads
correctly, as shown in Fig 5-49. For cardiac and abdominal imag-
ing, place the respiratory sensor on the patient's abdomen and fix
with a strap, see Fig 5-50.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-29 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-49

Fig. 5-50
3. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and hold the
alarm ball, see Fig 5-51.

Fig. 5-51

NPD-MRI-1301 5-30 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4. Position the patient with the arm along the patient’s side or over-
head.
5. Place the AIM Torso on the patient’s chest/abdomen/pelvis accord-
ing to the scan site, see Fig 5-52.

Fig. 5-52
6. Connect the coil to the patient table.
7. Attach the coil to the patient with straps, see Fig 5-53.

Fig. 5-53
8. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-54.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-31 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-54
9. Place the knee support under the patient's legs to make the
patient comfortable, see Fig 5-55.

Fig. 5-55
10.Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.5 Hip and prostate examination

Use AIM Spine with AIM GP Flex coil in hip and prostate examination.
Coil preparation
Place the AIM Spine and AIM NV coil base on the patient table and
cover with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-56.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-32 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-56
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in supine orientation.
Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact
• For the head-first examination: place the patient’s head on the
base of the AIM NV, see Fig 5-57.
• For the feet-first examination: place a head support under the
patient’s head to ensure patient comfortable, see Fig 5-57.

Fig. 5-57
2. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and hold the
alarm ball, see Fig 5-58.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-33 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-58
3. The patient’s arms are placed on either side of the body, and the
strap can be used to prevent arm movement.
4. Select the appropriate coil according to the scanning range:
• For a hip examination, the AIM GP Flex can be placed at the
patient’s hip, see Fig 5-59.
• For a prostate examination, the AIM GP Flex can be placed in the
patient’s pubic symphysis, see Fig 5-59.

Fig. 5-59
5. Connect the coil to the patient table.
6. Attach the coil to the patient with strap, see Fig 5-60.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-34 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-60
7. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-61.

Fig. 5-61
8. Place the knee support under the patient's legs to make the
patient comfortable, see Fig 5-62.

Fig. 5-62
9. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-35 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5.4.6 Abdomen and pelvic examination

Coil preparation
Place the AIM Spine and AIM NV coil base on the patient table and
cover with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-63.

Fig. 5-63
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in head-first supine orien-
tation, with the head on the base of the AIM NV coil, see Fig 5-64.

Fig. 5-64
2. Place the respiratory sensor on the patient's abdomen and secure
with a strap, see Fig 5-65.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-36 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-65
3. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and hold the
alarm ball, see Fig 5-66.

Fig. 5-66
4. The patient's arms are placed on either side of the body or hold
them overhead.
5. Place an AIM Torso on the patient’s abdomen and place an AIM
Torso or an AIM GP Flex M on the patient’s pelvis depending the
patient’s size, see Fig 5-67.
• Depending on the patient's size, the long diameter of the AIM
Torso can be placed vertically on the patient's abdomen/pelvic
cavity to increase coverage.
• It is recommended to maintain a 5cm overlap between the two
coils to improve the image quality.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-37 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-67
6. Connect the coil to the patient table.
7. Attach the coil to the patient with straps, see Fig 5-68.

Fig. 5-68
8. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-69.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-38 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-69
9. Place the knee support under the patient's legs to make the
patient comfortable, see Fig 5-70.

Fig. 5-70
10.Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.7 Whole body examination

Coil preparation
Place the AIM Spine and AIM NV coil base on the patient table and
cover with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-71.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-39 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-71
Patient position
1. Position the patient on the patient table in head-first supine orien-
tation, with the head on the base of the AIM NV, see Fig 5-72.

Fig. 5-72
2. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and hold the
alarm ball, see Fig 5-73.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-40 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-73
3. Connect the upper cover of the AIM NV to the base, and mount the
mirror to the upper cover, see Fig 5-74.

Fig. 5-74
4. Place the respiratory sensor on the patient’s abdomen and secure
with a strap, see Fig 5-75.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-41 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-75
5. Place one AIM Torso on the patient's chest and the other AIM
Torso on the lower abdomen, see Fig 5-76.
• Place the long diameter of the AIM Torso vertically on the patient’s
chest and abdomen to improve coverage.
• It is recommended to maintain a 5cm overlap between the two
coils to improve the image quality.

Fig. 5-76
6. Connect the coil to the patient table.
7. Attach the coil to the patient with straps, see Fig 5-77.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-42 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-77
8. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-78.

Fig. 5-78
9. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.8 Breast examination

5.4.8.1 Breast examination with AIM Loop Flex

Coil Preparation
1. Place the AIM Spine and AIM NV coil base on the patient table and
cover with coil mattresses, remove the AIM NV and spine mat-
tress, see Fig 5-79.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-43 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-79
2. Place the base of the breast coil holder and the posterior ramp
mattress on the AIM Spine. The scale line on the bracket is aligned
with the scale line between the scales 3 and 4 of the AIM Spine.
Place the head support on the front of the magnet side of the
breast coil holder, see Fig 5-80.

Fig. 5-80
3. Place the AIM Loop Flex into the groove of the breast coil holder
and place the mattress on the base of the holder, see Fig 5-81.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-44 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-81
4. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-82.

Fig. 5-82
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the prepared coil in the head-first prone
orientation, see Fig 5-83.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-45 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-83
2. The breasts extend naturally in the grooves of the breast holder
with the head on the head support.
• The breasts are hanging freely in the coil and that the breasts and
the axilla area are free of holds.
3. Ask the patient to place the arms either next to the head or down-
wards next to the body.
4. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and hold the
alarm ball, see Fig 5-84.

Fig. 5-84
5. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact.
6. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

NOTE At the end of the breast scan, the operator

should pay attention to the fact that the patient

NPD-MRI-1301 5-46 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

is not caught during the removal and descent of

the patient table.

5.4.8.2 Breast examination with Breast Coil

Coil Preparation
1. Remove the base of the AIM NV from the patient table. Place the
AIM Spine on the patient table and remove the head support of the
AIM Spine, see Fig 5-85.

Fig. 5-85
2. When the patient is too tall, the AIM Spine must be removed from
the patient table, see Fig 5-86.

Fig. 5-86
3. Place the Breast Coil on the patient table where the neck unit of
AIM NV is removed. Align and secure the Breast Coil base to the
AIM Spine, see Fig 5-87.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-47 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-87
4. When the AIM Spine is removed, move the Breast Coil to the end
of the table appropriately and use the special base to fix the coil.
Use the table top mattress-NV side to fill the space between the
dedicated base and the spine coil socket, see Fig 5-88.

Fig. 5-88
5. Place the head support in front of the breast holder, see Fig 5-89.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-48 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-89
6. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-90.

Fig. 5-90
7. Place the ramp mattress on the AIM Spine and close to the Breast
Coil, see Fig 5-91.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-49 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-91
Patient positoning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in the head-first prone ori-
entation, see Fig 5-92.

Fig. 5-92
2. The breasts are hanging freely in the grooves of the breast holder,
and the head is placed on the headrest, see Fig 5-93.
• Adjust the position of the headrest to make the patient feel com-
fortable.
• The breasts are hanging freely in the coil, and that the breasts and
the axilla area are free of holds.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-50 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-93
3. Ask the patient to place arms either next to the head or down-
wards next to the body, wear the soundproof headphones and
hold the alarm ball.
• When the patient placing the arms overhead, it is recommended to
place a sandbag or mattress on the patients’ elbow and the patient
table to make the patient comfortable. Care must be taken to
observe the patient’s hands to avoid rubbing against the magnet’s
cover during the patient table movement, which may cause an
injury, see Fig 5-94.

Fig. 5-94
4. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact.
5. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

NOTE At the end of the breast scan, the operator

should be aware that the patient is not caught
during the patient table removal and descent.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-51 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

5.4.9 Shoulder examination

Coil Preparation
1. Remove the AIM NV coil base from the patient table. Place the AIM
Spine on the patient table and remove the head side AIM Spine,
see Fig 5-95.

Fig. 5-95
2. Place the Shoulder Coil base on the removed AIM NV and dock
with the AIM Spine, see Fig 5-96.

Fig. 5-96
3. Place the front of the NV mattress and the head support in the
position of the removed AIM NV, see Fig 5-97.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-52 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-97
4. Place the Shoulder Coil into the base and slide it to the left or right
depending on the scanning position, see Fig 5-98.

Fig. 5-98
5. Place the Shoulder Coil mattress in the coil, base and spine coil as
shown for optimal image quality and patient comfort, see Fig 5-99.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-53 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-99
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in the head-first supine
orientation, with the head on the head support and the shoulder
on the Shoulder Coil. If necessary, support the patient’s back and
the shoulder with a 15°/30° wedge support to comfort the patient,
see Fig 5-100.

Fig. 5-100
2. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-101.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-54 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-101
3. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and use the
health hand hold the alarm ball, see Fig 5-102.

Fig. 5-102
4. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-103.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-55 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-103
5. Place a knee support to improve patient comfort, see Fig 5-104.

Fig. 5-104
6. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.10Elbow examination
Use AIM GP Flex S in elbow examination. Position the patient in the
head- first prone or the supine/lateral orientation, with the arm along
the patient’s side.

5.4.10.1Head-first prone - overhead

Coil preparation
1. Place the AIM Spine, AIM NV coil base on the patient table and
cover with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-105.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-56 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-105
2. When the patient is fat or otherwise causes the arm to interfere
with the AIM NV coil base, it is recommended to remove the AIM
NV coil base and fill the corresponding position with a isolated
mattress, see Fig 5-106.

Fig. 5-106
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient head-first prone on the patient table with the
hand on the base of the AIM NV (or on where the AIM NV
removed), see Fig 5-107.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-57 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-107
2. Wrap the coil around the elbow joint of the patient, see Fig 5-108.

Fig. 5-108
3. Use strap to secure the coil, see Fig 5-109.

Fig. 5-109

NPD-MRI-1301 5-58 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4. Place a sandbag on the lower arm for fixing to prevent arm move-
ment, see Fig 5-110.

Fig. 5-110
5. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-111.

Fig. 5-111
6. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and use the
health hand hold the alarm ball, see Fig 5-112.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-59 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-112
7. Place mattresses between the patient’s body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-113.

Fig. 5-113
8. Connect the coil to the patient table.

5.4.10.2Head-first supine/lateral - at side

Place the AIM Spine, AIM NV coil base on the patient table and cover
with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-114.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-60 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-114
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in the head-first supine/
lateral orientation, with the head on the base of the AIM NV, see
Fig 5-115.

Fig. 5-115
2. Place the patient’s arms along the body with the affected arm as
much in the ISOCenter as possible.
3. Wrap the coil around the elbow joint of the patient, see Fig 5-116.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-61 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-116
4. Place a sandbag on the lower arm for fixing to prevent arm move-
ment, see Fig 5-117.

Fig. 5-117
5. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-118.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-62 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-118
6. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and use the
health hand hold the alarm ball, see Fig 5-119.

Fig. 5-119
7. Place mattresses between the patient's body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-120.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-63 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-120
8. When the patient is supine, the knee support can be placed under
the legs to make the patient comfortable, see Fig 5-121.

Fig. 5-121
9. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.11Wrist examination
The AIM GP Flex S is used for hand and wrist examinations. Place the
patient in head first prone position or the supine/lateral position with
the arms flat.

5.4.11.1Head-first prone - overhead

Coil preparation
1. Place the AIM Spine, AIM NV coil base on the patient table and
cover with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-122.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-64 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-122
2. When the patient is fat or otherwise causes the arms to interfere
with the AIM NV coil base, it is recommended to remove the AIM
NV coil base and fill the corresponding position with NV mattress,
see Fig 5-123.

Fig. 5-123
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in the head-first prone ori-
entation, with the hand on the base of the AIM NV. A wedge sup-
port can be placed under the patient to improve comfort, see Fig 5-
124.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-65 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-124
2. Wrap the coil around the wrist joint of the patient, see Fig 5-125.

Fig. 5-125
3. Use straps to secure the coil, see Fig 5-126.

Fig. 5-126

NPD-MRI-1301 5-66 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4. Place a sandbag on the lower arm for fixing to prevent arm move-
ment, see Fig 5-127.

Fig. 5-127
5. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-128.

Fig. 5-128
6. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and use the
health hand hold the alarm ball, see Fig 5-129.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-67 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-129
7. Place mattresses between the patient's body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact.
8. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.11.2Head-first supine/lateral - at side

Place the AIM Spine, AIM NV coil base on the patient table and cover
with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-130.

Fig. 5-130
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient on the patient table in the head-first supine/
lateral orientation, with the head on the base of the AIM NV, see
Fig 5-131.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-68 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-131
2. Place the patient’s arms on both sides of the body and place the
affected arm as much in the ISOCenter as possible.
3. Wrap the coil around the patient’s wrist and fix the coil with
straps, see Fig 5-132.

Fig. 5-132
4. Place a sandbag on the lower arm for fixing to prevent arm move-
ment, see Fig 5-133.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-69 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-133
5. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-134

Fig. 5-134
6. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and use the
health hand hold the alarm ball, see Fig 5-135.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-70 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-135
7. Place mattresses between the patient's body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-136.

Fig. 5-136
8. Place a knee support under the patient’s legs to improve patient
comfort, see Fig 5-137.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-71 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-137
9. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.12Knee examination

5.4.12.1Examination with AIM Loop Flex

Coil Preparation
Place the AIM Spine, AIM NV coil base on the patient table and cover
with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-138.

Fig. 5-138
• The isolated mattress at the end of the table can be flipped over,
and the headphones and alarm ball cable pass under the isolated
mattresses.
• When the patient is too tall, the AIM NV coil base needs to be
removed, and the corresponding position is filled with the NV mat-
tress.
Patient positioning

NPD-MRI-1301 5-72 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

1. Position the patient in feet-first supine orienation and place the

head support under the patient’s head to ensure patient comfort,
see Fig 5-139.

Fig. 5-139
2. Wrap the coil around the patient’s affected knee and secure it with
a strap, see Fig 5-140.

Fig. 5-140
3. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-141.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-73 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-141
4. Place a sandbag on the shank to prevent leg movement, see Fig 5-
142.

Fig. 5-142
• The shank support can be placed under the patient's healthy knee
to improve patient comfort, see Fig 5-143.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-74 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-143
5. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and hold the
alarm ball, see Fig 5-144.

Fig. 5-144
6. Place mattresses between the patient's body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-145.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-75 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-145
7. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.12.2Examination with Knee Coil

Coil preparation
1. Place the AIM Spine, AIM NV coil base on the patient table and
cover with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-146.
• The isolated mattresses at the end of the table can be flipped over,
and the headphones and alarm ball cables pass under the isolated
mattresses.
• When the patient is too tall, the AIM NV coil base needs to be
removed, and the corresponding position is filled with the NV mat-
tress.

Fig. 5-146
2. Place the Knee Coil on the spine mattress, and remove the upper
part from the base, see Fig 5-147.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-76 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-147
Patient positioning
1. Position the patient in the feet-first supine orientation, and place
the affected knee in the coil base. Place the head support under
the patient head to ensure patient comfort, see Fig 5-148.

Fig. 5-148
2. Place the upper part of the coil on the coil base and close it tightly,
see Fig 5-149.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-77 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-149
• When closing the coil, make sure that the patient’s skin is not
pinched by the coil components.
• Place the mattress between the inner wall of the coil and the knee.
3. Place the foot support under the affected foot to secure the leg
and place the shank support under the healthy knee to improve
patient comfort, see Fig 5-150.

Fig. 5-150
4. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-151.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-78 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-151
5. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and hold the
alarm ball, see Fig 5-152.

Fig. 5-152
6. Place mattresses between the patient's body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-153.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-79 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-153
7. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

5.4.13Ankle examination
Coil preparation
Place the AIM Spine, AIM NV coil base on the patient table and cover
with coil mattresses, see Fig 5-154.
• The isolated mattress at the end of the table can be flipped over,
and the headphones and alarm ball cables pass under the isolated
mattress.
• When the patient is too tall, the AIM NV coil base needs to be
removed, and the corresponding position is filled with the NV mat-
tress.

Fig. 5-154
Patient positioning

NPD-MRI-1301 5-80 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

1. Position the patient on the table in the feet-first supine orientation

and place the head support under the patient’s head to ensure
patient comfort, see Fig 5-155.

Fig. 5-155
2. Wrap the foot or ankle with the AIM GP Flex M and fix the coil with
straps. Connect the coil to the patient table, see Fig 5-156.

Fig. 5-156
3. Place a sandbag on the shank for fixation, see Fig 5-157.
• Place the foot support under the patient’s foot to improve patient
comfort.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-81 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-157
4. The patient needs to wear soundproof headphones and hold the
alarm ball, see Fig 5-158.

Fig. 5-158
5. Place mattresses between the patient's body and arms, legs, or
between the cable and the body to prevent skin-to-skin and skin-
to-cable contact, see Fig 5-159.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-82 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 5-159
6. Move the patient to the ISOCenter.

NPD-MRI-1301 5-83 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NPD-MRI-1301 5-84 Receive Coils

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 6 Scan

6.1 Preparation for scanning

WARNING! Before using the system, it is essential that you

read and familiarize yourself with all Warnings
and Cautions given in chapter 2 Safety.

NOTE The virus scan and the normal scan for the
patients should not be used at the same time,
otherwise the antivirus operation may cause
Windows to restart. Please exit the virus scan-
ning software before execute the patient scan.

6.1.1 Non-magnetic equipment

The following equipment should be available:
• A non-magnetic trolley and wheelchair.
• Lockers with a non-magnetic key for patient’s valuables.

6.1.2 Informing the patient

Some patients will experience anxiety over their medical conditions
and the MRI scans. By providing information on MRI, you can reduce
the patient’s anxiety over the procedure. Make brochures on MRI
scanning available to the patients and their family members. Before
the scan, the MRI facility staff should discuss the procedure with the
patient and answer all questions concerning MRI scanning.
Inform the patient about the following items:
• Most of patient’s body will come into close proximity to the scan-
ner.
• The patient will hear knocking noises during the scan.
• The total time for the scan.
• A family member or a friend can stay in the scan room to provide
reassurance.
• No ionizing radiation is produced by the scan.

NPD-MRI-1301 6-1 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• The operator will have visual and/or voice contact with the patient
at all times.
• When the patients feel uncomfortable or need help, they can pinch
the alarm ball and release, then the buzzer rings will be ring until
the operator presses the reset button.

NOTE Patients are often more relaxed if they are told

that there will be periods of time (when they
don’t hear any noise) when they may stretch, or
scratch, or move their arms and legs - providing
the region of interest is not moved.

NOTE Check the alarm ball function before scanning to

prevent the alarm ball from leaking and the oper-
ator cannot hear the patient call.

6.1.3 Special cases

Claustrophobia
• Allow time to allay patient’s anxiety
• The presence of a nurse or relative may help
• Use of the mirror on the head coil may help
Neonates, infants and children
• A nurse or parent may have to be present.
• Physical contact is recommended if it does not interfere with imag-
ing.
• Some hospitals prefer to give oral sedation to children up to 6
years. In this case observation is required.
• Neonates or infants may fall asleep after feeding.
Trauma patients
For patients with trauma, careful observation should be given. For
information on monitoring, see Chapter 2.9 Patient monitoring.
Inflammable gases
The use of inflammable gases is not allowed in the scanning room.
Anaesthesia
Be careful to observe. For information on monitoring, see Chapter 2.9
Patient monitoring.
Emergencies

NPD-MRI-1301 6-2 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• If a patient’s at risk, remove the patient as quickly as possible

from the MRI room so that emergency aid can be given promptly
and without a risk to the patient or personnel.
• MRI personnel should be trained to cope with an emergency situa-
tion.

6.2 Patient preparation

6.2.1 Patient positioning

The patient is positioned using the coil, the positioning aid, the head-
phones, and the alarm ball, and the patient is moved to the isocenter
position after the positioning is completed.
For the position of each scanning part, please refer to the position of
Chapter 5.4 Regular examination positioning.

6.2.1.1 Move the patient to the ISOCenter

The steps are as follows:
1. Move the scanned part roughly under the laser light;
2. Ask the patient to close their eyes and turn on the laser light;
3. Fine-tune the position of the patient table: manually control the
patient table with the knob until the laser cross is fully pointed to
the operator's desired position.
4. Moving the patient table to the scanning position can be done in
the following three ways:
- Automatic mode: Press and hold the One button to enter but-
ton for 1 second, and the table will advance toward ISOCenter
without releasing the button. Note: The laser light goes out
while the button is pressed.
- Manual mode: Click the One button to enter button, the laser
light will go out at this time, and the marker light will be illumi-
nated, rotate into the exit knob, the patient table will manually
enter the magnet bore, and the patient table will decelerate
before reaching the ISOCenter.

NOTE After reaching the ISOCenter, release the access

knob to complete the delivery task. If you
release the access knob again after the release,
the horizontal in and out motion will continue,
but each time the marked position passes

NPD-MRI-1301 6-3 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

through the ISOCenter, it will decelerate and

stop moving.

- Mixed mode:
• After the automatic mode is activated, the table is moving. At this
time, you can rotate the knob and randomly convert to manual
mode.
• After the manual mode is activated, you can press and hold the
One button to enter button for 1 second to automatically send
the patient to the ISOCenter.

6.2.2 Patient registration

Click the Patient Registration navigation button to enter the
patient registration page. For details, see Chapter 4.3 Patient registra-
tion. After completing the required data for the patient information,
select Scan and enter the patient examination interface.

6.2.3 Positioning window

In the Positioning window, adjust the Stack positioning block and
Slab pre-saturation to adjust the FOV area and non-FOV area by pan-
ning, selecting, and edge changes. See Chapter 4.4.3 Positioning.

6.2.4 Selection sequence

The selection sequence is divided into an initialization scan queue, a
protocol level selection, a protocol library selection, and a replication
sequence.

6.2.4.1 Initialize the scan queue

The system loads the first set of sequences under the organ into the
scan queue based on the manufacturer/site/organ selected at the
time of patient registration, see Fig 6-1.

NPD-MRI-1301 6-4 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 6-1 The first set of sequences under the organ

6.2.4.2 Protocol level selection

After entering the patient examination interface, select the sequence
by location, organ, and strategy, and double-click or drag the
selected sequence to the scan queue, see Fig 6-2.

Fig. 6-2 Protocol level selection

NPD-MRI-1301 6-5 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

6.2.4.3 Protocol library selection

After selecting the sequence, enter the scan tab in the function area

on the right, click the button to pop up the sequence library

form, see Fig 6-3.

Fig. 6-3 Protocol library selection

The sequence in the sequence library form can be dragged into the
scan queue by selecting the sequence in the sequence library and
holding down the left mouse button, see Fig 6-4.

Fig. 6-4 Sequence selection

NPD-MRI-1301 6-6 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

6.2.4.4 Copy sequence

The steps to copy a sequence are as follows:
1. After selecting the sequence, click the right mouse button and
select Copy in the menu to append all the selected sequences to
the back of the scan queue.
2. Or use the left mouse button to drag and drop the scan to com-
plete (scanned, imaged successfully, imaged partial failure and
imaging failed completely) sequence copied to the specified loca-
tion.

6.2.5 Sequence parameter editing

Sequence parameters include Protocol, Routine, Geometry, Contrast,
Acquisition, System, Expand, and Service. For details, see Chapter
4.4.5 Parameter editing area.

6.3 Scanning Process

6.3.1 Start scan

Click Start Scan to scan.
The edited sequence in the scan queue is in scan completion
(scanned, completely failed, partially failed, imaging successfully).

6.3.2 End scan

After the scan is completed, click the End Exam button to complete
the examination.

6.3.3 Image viewing and post processing

Select a study record in the patient check list area, or a Series
record, click the corresponding post-processing function in the image
function processing entry, or right-click the item in the right-click
menu to load the selected image Series directly into the image view.
The page performs image browsing and processing. See Chapter 4.5
Image viewing and post processing.

6.3.4 Management
The management of patient data can be done in the Patient Manage-
ment Toolbar. See Chapter 4.2.4 Patient management.

NPD-MRI-1301 6-7 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

6.3.5 Move the patient from the magnet bore

After imaging is complete, the patient is removed from the magnet
cavity:
• Rotate the knob on the control panel to the lower/out of position
and keep it, the patient table can be removed from the magnet
bore.

6.4 Imaging sequence

Sequence type of NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging
system:
• Spin echo (SE)
• Turbo spin echo (TSE)
• Inversion recovery turbo spin echo (IRTSE)
• Fast field echo (FFE)
• Echo planar imaging (EPI)
• Dual fast field echo (DFFE)
• Balanced fast field echo (BFFE)
• DIXON
• THRIVE

6.4.1 Spin echo

Spin Echo (SE) is the traditional standard sequence in MRI. It enables
scanning quite pure T1, PD and T2-weighted images, thanks to the
180-degree rephrasing RF pulse. With a symmetrical structure where
the rephasing pulse is halfway between the 90-degree excitation
pulse and the center of the sampling window, this sequence success-
fully compensates the imperfections caused by magnetic field inho-
mogeneity and water-fat dephasing. In practice scan times with SE
are competitive compared to Turbo Spin Echo only when T1-weighted
timing is used, so in the following we will concentrate on T1-weighted
SE applications.
T2-weighted scan:
Large flip angles (100 to 130 degrees) increase T2 weighting with
long TR and long TE spin echo sequences. This method is called
THRIFT (Throughput Heightened Rapid Increased Flip T2. It is applied
in some pre-defined protocols.

NPD-MRI-1301 6-8 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

T1-weighted scan:
Spin echo sequences with short TR and TE are used in some applica-
tions (e.g. for abdomen). Increased flip angles (over 90 degrees)
theoretically improve SNR. The recommended flip angles, in this
case, range from 110 to 130 degrees.
Partial flip angles used in the T1 spin echo sequence increase T1
weighting. This is applied in the brain protocol to improve brain mat-
ter contrast.

6.4.2 Turbo spin echo

Turbo Spin Echo (TSE) sequences improve the efficacy of routine MRI
exams. The main purpose of TSE is to reduce scan times while
acquiring information in a very efficient way. In the TSE sequences a
wide signal bandwidth (BW) can be used without compromising the
SNR. A wider bandwidth means shorter sampling times in the
sequence, which means less motion, flow, susceptibility and distor-
tion artifacts.
The echo time, TE, is calculated automatically when you change the
turbo factor or the echo spacing. A short echo spacing can be used to
reduce the accumulation of imperfections such as flow or motion arti-
facts during the sampling time period.
There are also flow compensated TSE sequences with additional gra-
dient events between echoes to compensate flow artifacts. Their
trade-off is longer echo spacing and thus smaller turbo factors.

6.4.3 Inversion recovery turbo spin echo

The Inversion Recovery (IR) sequences consist of a preparatory 180-
degree RF pulse followed by a standard data acquisition sequence
TSE. IRTSE sequences are TSE based sequences with inversion. The
power of IR sequences is their contrast behavior. They allow the T1
contrast to be roughly doubled relative to other T1-weighted images.
Perhaps more important is their ability to suppress tissues based on
T1 relaxation times and well selected timing.
The advantages of IRTSE are the contrast and all the TSE advantages
such as reduced flow sensitivity and less distortion. IRTSE combines
the IR contrast and the advantages of TSE.

6.4.4 Fast field echo

The fast field echo (FFE) sequence is an RF spoiled field echo (gradi-
ent echo) sequence. You can scan T1, PD, T2*-weighted images.

NPD-MRI-1301 6-9 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Compared to the TSE and SE methods the FFE contrast mechanism is

somewhat more complicated. The flip angle plays an important role in
the contrast, especially when TR is short. The chemical shift may also
heavily affect the contrast.
The FFE sequence is especially efficient as the sampling period can be
much longer compared to the corresponding SE sequence. The TR/TE
ratio may be rather high, providing a large number of slices. There is
a lot of freedom is modifying TR as the desired contrast can often be
maintained by adjusting the flip angle.

6.4.5 Echo planar imaging

The transversal of the k-space for EPI is different from conventional
imaging methods. EPI acquires multiple phase-encoded data after a
single RF excitation, whereas conventional methods have RF pulses
before each phase-encoded data acquisition. This is achieved by
using a fast oscillating readout gradient in combination with a weak
phase encoding gradient spike. Phase encoded data is acquired dur-
ing the read gradient pulse, and the scattered phase encoding gradi-
ent spikes cause the acquired data to cover the K space in the phase
encoding direction. The imaging time of EPI is very short compared to
conventional imaging methods.
Due to the nature of the method it is prone to imaging artifacts of
which the most notable is the N/2-ghost. The artifact represents itself
as a double image translated in the phase direction and is caused by
the slightest imperfections in the gradient chain or field inhomogene-
ities. A pre-calibration is always performed to reduce the artifact.
Water-fat shift is often clearly visible and the use of fat suppression
by means of IR is advised to diminish the artifact. Heavy susceptibil-
ity artifacts reduce the usability of the method near cavities. Image
distortion is caused by field inhomogeneities and can be reduced with
linear compensation, careful shimming, and the use of multiple RF
excitations for acquiring the data. In multi-shot EPI a portion of the
k-space is acquired after respective RF excitations resulting in full k-
space coverage after the acquired data is combined. The number of
RF excitations is controlled with the turbo factor that describes the
number of phase encodings acquired after respective excitations.
Thus, setting the turbo factor to one half of the image matrix size in
the phase encoding direction gives rise to two RF excitations per EPI
scan. When the turbo factor is set to 1/4 matrix, 4 excitations are
performed, and so on, and the imaging time is increased accordingly.

NPD-MRI-1301 6-10 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

6.4.6 Dual fast field echo

Dual fast field echo (DFFE) sequence produces two adjacent gradient
echoes whose echo times can be adjusted independently. The two
echoes are reconstructed separately, which gives two images per
each slice. The echo time allows the two echoes to achieve different
contrasts. DFFE sequence is very efficient in producing in-phase and
out-phase images for fat and water, which can be used to detect
areas of fat such as in the liver. The water-lipid phase is obtained for
each echo of the DFFE sequence.
Echo time setting such as:
(TE2-TE1) = n/(2*3.5 ppm * f0), where n=[1,3,5,...], and f0= 63.86
MHz.
and with echo time of
TE1 = m/(3.5 ppm *f0), where m = [1,2,3,...].

6.4.7 Balanced fast field echo

Balanced fast field echo (BFFE) is a steady-state sequence. Steady
state is a dynamic equilibrium where both the transverse and longitu-
dinal magnetizations are maintained all the time. The basic condition
for steady state is that TR is much shorter than tissue T2. Steady
state sequences are short TR gradient echo sequences with refocused
gradients. The difference between BFFE and conventional steady
state sequences is that in BFFE the time integrals over one repetition
period of all the gradients are zero. In the conventional sequence,
there is always at least one non-zero component.
Like most other steady-state sequences, the contrast in BFFE is
dependent on the ratio sqrt(T2/T1) when the flip angle is large, and
approaches the “proton density“ appearance when the flip angle is
small. It is important to remember that BFFE is not a T2-weighted
sequence. Moderate T2 and short T1 (eg, lipids) can behave as bright
as a tissue having a long T2 and long T1 (eg, liquid).
Compared to conventional steady-state sequences, BFFE has the fol-
lowing benefits:
• it has better inherent signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)
• it has less sensitive to flow
These advantages, combined with the high contrast between fluids,
such as cerebrospinal fluid and most other tissues, make this
sequence the best choice for spinal imaging.

NPD-MRI-1301 6-11 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

6.4.8 DIXON
Different resonance frequencies of fat and water are utilized in the
DIXON method. At 1.5T the fat-water frequency difference is about
220Hz.
When spins are allowed to process, this frequency difference causes a
phase difference between fat and water signals. In the Three point
DIXON method fat and water images are decomposed from the
source images collected with three different echo times. These TE
times correspond to 0, ð and 2ð phase differences between fat and
water. The first in-phase time is 4.5ms. The time required to bring
the fat and water spins in opposite phase is therefore half of this time
(6.7ms).
The DIXON sequence is indicated by an additional word “DIXON” in
front of the sequence name. In addition, the three echo times are
listed in the sequence name. The contrast of the DIXON FFE
sequence is determined by all these TE times. Because the sequence
is repeated for all TE times, the scan time is also tripled.
Because of long TE times the DIXON FFE sequences tend to be PD or
T2* weighted. In spite of the limited possibilities to control contrast,
the flip angle is an easy way to control the weighting between PD and
T2*.
The DIXON SE sequence produces the required fat-water phase dif-
ferences b shifting the refocusing pulse. The actual TE time is kept
constant and can be freely adjusted. This is because at the moment
when RF echo refocuses, the fat and water phase difference is zero.
DIXON sequences produce three images of each slice: fat, water and
combined image. The combined image is the same as a normal FFE
image with three averages.
DIXON sequences are sensitive to sequence SNR. The reduced SNR
leads to increased uncertainty in the phase of the signal which leads
to misregistered voxels, which are fat voxels in water image and vice
versa. This effect is more pronounced on the boundaries where the
SNR might be low. A warning is displayed if the user has reduced SNR
below secure limit.
DIXON sequences are sensitive to flow, patient movement and signal
fold-over (aliasing) often causing phase changes, which can lead to
misregistered voxels.

6.4.9 THRIVE
THRIVE, T1 weighted high resolution isotropic volume examination, is
a 3D imaging sequence based on T1FFE sequence. Only the coding

NPD-MRI-1301 6-12 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

order is changed from the linear coding order of T1FFE 3D to the low-
to-high radial coding order segmentation shot. Each shot starts at the
center of the k-space and diverge toward the periphery of the k-
space. The THRIVE sequence always applies elliptical coding.
Prior to each shot, the magnetization of the previous shot is killed
through spoiling and saturation. This makes the sequence intrinsi-
cally more T1- weighted than normal T1FFE and also more robust to
flow artifacts. However, the main value of the sequence is in combi-
nation with magnetization preparation pulses as they need only be
applied once per shot prior to the warmup due to the radial low-high
coding order. The coding order therefore allows any preparation to
affect the contrast very efficiently without implying rigorous restric-
tions. Finally, the smooth and rapid k-space trajectory of each shot
makes THRIVE very robust.

NPD-MRI-1301 6-13 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NPD-MRI-1301 6-14 Scan

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 7 Optional parts and

accessories

This section provides information for optional parts and accessories

for the NeuMR 1.5T medical magnetic resonance imaging system.
Please read and familiarize yourself with the use of each part and
accessory before using them.

7.1 Patient table interface and accessory connection

Coil sockets and connections to other accessories are provided on the
patient table, see Fig 7-1.

Fig. 7-1 Patient table interface

Table 7-1 Interface description on patient table

No. Name Description

1 AIM NV coil socket AIM NV coil is connected to the system via

this socket.

2 AIM NV coil slot Auxiliary AIM NV coil access system.

NPD-MRI-1301 7-1 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 7-1 Interface description on patient table

No. Name Description

3 AIM Spine coil socket AIM Spine coil is connected to the system
via this socket.

4 AIM Spine coil slot Auxiliary AIM Spine coil access system.

5 AIM Spine coil lock shaft Help AIM Spine coil fixation.

6 Coil socket Surface coil and dedicated coil are con-

nected to the system via this socket.

7 Headphones and alarm The headphones and alarm ball are respec-
ball socket tively connected to the system via corre-
sponding socket.

a) Alarm ball socket The alarm ball is connected to the system

via this socket.

b) Headphone socket The headphones are connected to the sys-

tem via this socket.

8 Strap slot The strap is fixed to the patient table via

this slot.

9 Infusion rod slot The infusion rod slot is fixed to the patient
table via this slot.

10 Spine coil unit mark Mark the position of the spine coil unit.

11 The farthest position point The patient table can enter the farthest
point in the center of the magnet, and
positioning beyond this point will fail.

12 Emergency stop button Patient table emergency stop button, one

on each side, you need to manually move
the table after pressing the button, the
same button should be used for reset.

7.1.1 Alarm ball

Connecting: Insert the raised portion of the alarm ball connector into
the slot and the recessed portion of the arrow is inserted vertically
into the slot. After the insertion, the docking device automatically
locks, Fig 7-2.
Removing: Finger pinch the white unlocking device in the middle of
the connector and gently pull it out, Fig 7-2.

NPD-MRI-1301 7-2 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 7-2 Connecting and removing of alarm ball

7.1.2 Headphone
Connecting: Insert the headphone connector into the slot vertically,
and the docking device will automatically lock after insertion, Fig 7-3.
Removing: Finger pinch the middle of the connector to unlock the
device and gently pull it out, Fig 7-3.

Fig. 7-3 Connecting and removing of headphone

7.1.3 Physiology gating

WARNING! Direct sunlight should be avoided to illuminate

the components of the physiological gating to
avoid abnormal temperature rises within the
system components.

NPD-MRI-1301 7-3 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! It is not advisable to use a physiological gating

system in environments with flammable gases
or toxic gases.

WARNING! Use the MRI conditional ECG electrodes and

leads. The MRI operator must read and carefully
follow the instructions for use, and use elec-
trodes that have not passed their expiration.

WARNING! Check the expiration date of the ECG electrode

patches and purchase new electrode patches if
necessary.

WARNING! The electrode patches are disposable devices

and should be disposed properly after use. It
cannot be sterilized for use, and the sterilized
electrode patches is not available.

WARNING! If the patient has an abnormality during the

scan, such as gradual heating or a feeling of tin-
gling, the scan should be stopped immediately.

WARNING! Only the NeuMR 1.5T system compatible elec-

trode patches and battery can be used.

NOTE To avoid direct contact of the patient’s skin with

the wire, a thin pad can be used under the wire.

NPD-MRI-1301 7-4 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

7.1.3.1 Invivo physiology gating

Invivo physiology gatings are shown in Fig 7-4. See Table 7-2 for the
key descriptions.

ECG RESP/PPG

Fig. 7-4 Invivo physiology gating

Table 7-2 Description

No. ECG RESP/PPG

1 Channel switch key Channel switch key

2 Channel indcator Channel indcator

3 Power indicator Power indicator

Connecting: After the battery is plugged in, the system automatically

connects. The signal light is steady green to indicate good communi-
cation. The green flashing signal indicates that the communication is
not normal. The red indicates that the battery is insufficient. The col-
orless indicates that the battery is not inserted or the battery is
exhausted.
Removing: If it is not used for a long time after use, it is recom-
mended to pull out the battery and plug in the charger to avoid the
power shortage affecting subsequent use.

NOTE When the electrode lead wire is connected with

the wireless module, the color indication at the
end of the lead wire should be consistent with
the color indication on the wireless module. If
the connection is reversed, the ECG waveform
will be display incorrectly.

NPD-MRI-1301 7-5 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

7.1.4 Strap
Connecting: Hold the ends of the strap clips with fingers and insert
the strap slot as shown in Fig 7-5. After the strap is correctly inserted,
the strap clips can be adjusted in the strap slot as needed.
Removing: Pinch the ends of the strap clip with fingers and remove
the strap slot, see Fig 7-5.

Fig. 7-5 Connecting and removing of the strap

7.1.5 Infusion rod

Connecting: Hold the infusion rod and insert it down into the infusion
holder hole of the patient table as shown in Fig 7-6.
Removing: Hold the infusion rod and pull up the infusion rod hole of
the patient table as shown in Fig 7-6.

Fig. 7-6 Connecting and removing of infusion rod

NPD-MRI-1301 7-6 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

7.2 Mattress and accessory

Table 7-3 Mattress and accessory

Accessory Illustration Application example

NV mattress

Spine mat-
tress(L and M
models. In
general, L+L
combination
mode is used,
and M+L com-
bination mode
is used when
L+L
head coil is
used.)

L+M

Head support
wedge

NPD-MRI-1301 7-7 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 7-3 Mattress and accessory

Accessory Illustration Application example

Isolated mat-
tress (two
models)

Knee support

Head support

Wedge sup-
port(15°, 30°)

NPD-MRI-1301 7-8 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 7-3 Mattress and accessory

Accessory Illustration Application example

Shank support

Foot support

Table top mat-

tress - NV side

Table top mat-

tress - foot
side

NPD-MRI-1301 7-9 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 7-3 Mattress and accessory

Accessory Illustration Application example

Strap (two
models)

Sandbag

Set of AIM
Loop Flex Coil

NPD-MRI-1301 7-10 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 7-3 Mattress and accessory

Accessory Illustration Application example

Set of Breast
Coil

Set of Shoul-
der Coil

Set of Knee
Coil

NPD-MRI-1301 7-11 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NPD-MRI-1301 7-12 Optional parts and accessories

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 8 System maintenance

In order to ensure safe, efficient and reliable operation of the system,

routine and regular maintenance of the system is very necessary.
The following two sets of procedures ensure stable operation of the
system:
• Routine system maintenance
• Periodic system maintenance
Routine system maintenance includes basic quality assurance and
daily quality assurance examination. Basic quality assurance includes
main field adjustment and 1st order shimming. Daily quality assur-
ance examination monitors the signal-to-noise of the coil, geometric
distortion, etc. to ensure image quality.
Your authorized service engineer will perform regular system mainte-
nance on a regular basis. Together, the routine system maintenance
and regular system maintenance monitor your system and help
ensure consistent performance.

8.1 Routine system maintenance

8.1.1 Basic quality assurance

8.1.1.1 Main field adjustment

The system automatically searches the main magnetic field frequency
of the magnet according to the set of phantom:

1. Click on the navigation bar in the Home interface;

2. In the System interface, click F0 Determination, see Fig 8-1;

NPD-MRI-1301 8-1 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 8-1
3. Enter the main field adjustment procedure, we need to put the
phantom according to the calibration instructions, as shown in
Fig 8-2. Prepare the main field adjustment according to the instruc-
tions, select the specified phantom, perform positioning, and move
the phantom to the ISOCenter position.

Fig. 8-2

NPD-MRI-1301 8-2 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

4. Then click Next, the system will automatically find the main field
center frequency, and display the corresponding signal acquisition
amplitude and spectrum graphic, see Fig 5;

Fig. 8-3
5. After the adjustment is completed, the main field frequency value
will be displayed, see Fig 8-4.

Fig. 8-4

8.1.1.2 1st order shimming

1. Click on the navigation bar in the Home interface to enter the

system interface;
2. In the System interface, click 1st order shimming, see Fig 8-5;

NPD-MRI-1301 8-3 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 8-5
3. Enter the 1st order shimming interface, we need to put the
phantom according to the calibration instructions, as shown in
Fig 8-6. Select the specified phantom, perform positioning, and
move the phantom to the ISOCenter position.

Fig. 8-6
4. Then click Next, the system will automatically calculate the 1st
order shimming data, and display the corresponding signal acqui-
sition shim graphic, see Fig 8-7;

NPD-MRI-1301 8-4 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Fig. 8-7

8.1.2 Daily quality assurance

For the daily quality assurance procedure you will need the following
equipment:
• AIM NV coil:
• F220 cylinder phantom
• T62 phantom support

8.1.2.1 Check of general system appearance

You should make a cursory review of the general condition of the
equipment. A good practice is to do so every time before starting
daily QA measurements.
Ensure that:
• The system does not exhibit any alarming, abnormal conditions
(see Chapter 2.8 Operating safely).
• The temperature and humidity in the scan room are normal.
• There is no water or other liquid on the floor, which could indicate,
for instance, a leak in the cooling system or an air conditioning
problem.
• The magnet does not appear physically damaged; the covers on
the magnet are intact (including the transmit coil surfaces above
and below the support).
• The console responds to your keyboard and mouse input.

NPD-MRI-1301 8-5 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

• The intercom, and optional patient monitoring equipment appear

to be working.
• Check the coil that you are using in the daily quality assurance
measurement according to instructions (general and coil-specific).
In case that the system fails these checks, evaluate the severity of
the problem and contact Service if necessary. Do not operate the
scanner or a faulty coil until the problem is solved.

8.1.2.2 Daily quality assurance examination

Please follow the following steps to carry out daily quality assurance
examination:
1. Place the phantom and phantom support on the patient table as
shown in Fig 8-8;

Fig. 8-8
2. Place the cross line of laser beam in the position as shown in Fig 8-
9;

Fig. 8-9

NPD-MRI-1301 8-6 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

3. Click on the navigation bar in the Home interface to enter the

system interface, and then click , choose Daily QA Examina-

tion to start daily quality assurance examination;
4. Fill in Table 8-1according to the inspection results.

Table 8-1
Parameter Test value Unit

Center frequency

RF calibration

Geometric Proportional geo-

accuracy metric distortion

Variance geometric
distortion

Maximum geomet-
ric distortion

SNR Mean

SD

SNR

Ghost value Ghost value

8.2 Periodic system maintenance

Properly trained service engineers perform periodic preventative
maintenance on your system to make reliable and consistent mea-
surements of key operational parameters. The preventative mainte-
nance sessions also provide standard preventative maintenance
activites necessary to keep the system at an optimum level of perfor-
mance. These key parameters are commonly referred to as critical
parameters. Taken collectively, they form the basis for a clear, con-
sistent and practical preventative procedure.
Apart from the simple visual checks and routine cleaning that are
explicitly described in Chapter 2 Safety for the various pieces of
equipment, the user should not perform any preventative mainte-
nance. No equipment racks contain user-service-able or user-repair-
able parts inside.

NPD-MRI-1301 8-7 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Serivce personnel must have specialized factory

training if the equipment is to be maintained in a
safe operating condition. Therefore, only prop-
erly trained and qualified personnel should be
authorized to service the equipment.

WARNING! Do not operate equipment with shrouds, panels,

covers, or doors opened or removed from any of
the components. If you operate MR equipment
with protective panels opened or removed, there
is the risk of electric shock that many result in
serious or fatal injury.

8.3 Stability test

The stability test verifies the normal state of the magnetic resonance
apparatus with a series of fast, simple, sensitive, powerful and effec-
tive tests. The purpose of these tests is not necessarily to diagnose
the problem, but to verify that the machine is working properly. The
aim is to ensure that the magnetic resonance system continues to
operate at a level close to that it was accepted. It is important to con-
duct this test regularly and consistently so that the trend (changes in
equipment performance) can be monitored and the recommended
test time is once every 3 months.
The stability test requires the following sets of tests:
• Center frequency: measure the resonance frequency of H nucleus
of the system
• RF calibration: measure the RF energy required for a specific Flip
angle
• Geometric accuracy: measure two-dimensional geometric distor-
tion
• SNR: measure the clinical effectiveness and hardware perfor-
mance of magnetic resonance imaging
• Ghost value: measure the amplitude of ghost signal and compares
it to the average signal amplitude and system background noise

NPD-MRI-1301 8-8 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

8.3.1 Testing tools

Use the F220 cylindrical uniform phantom and AIM NV coil as the
testing tools.

8.3.2 Testing conditions

Use two sequences, as shown in table 8-2.
Table 8-2
Constancy Test_1 SE Constancy Test_1
FFE

Scanning section direction transverse section

Frequency coding direction front and back

Reference position coil center

Matrix size for data acquisition 256X256

Flip angle 30°

FOV 250X250mm2

Nominal voxel size ( Δ x, Δ y, 0.98X0.98X5 0.98X0.98X10

selected thickness)

Transverse of the test phan- 17662, circle ( Φ =150)

tom- size and shape

Pixel bandwidth 100Hz/pixel

Sequence repeat time (TR) 1000 603

Echo time (TR) 30 25

Average number of times 1 1

8.3.3 Testing methods

1. Center frequency test method: use F0 Determination to get the
center frequency;
2. RF calibration test method: use B1 and Pickup Coil Adjustment to
get the calibration value;
3. Geometric accuracy test method: scan the Constancy Test
sequency;
• According to dx^(m)- scan image measurements
• dx - actual phantom size

NPD-MRI-1301 8-9 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

|dx^(m)-dx|
• RDx - × 100%
dx
4. SNR test method: scan the Constancy Test_1 sequence and mea-
sure the SNR as follow:
The ROI should be a aligned, regular geometric region. The
enclosed area is at least 85% of the image area of the signal gen-
erator of the test phantom.
Step 1: Image 1 in the ROI: measured average pixel value. The
number of results (minus any baseline pixel offset value) should
be referred to as image signal S.
Step 2: The difference between the pixel and the pixel is calcu-
lated as image 3 as follows: Image 3 = Image 1 - Image 2. Sub-
traction should avoid erroneous results. That is, the pixel value is
beyond the minimum (or maximum) pixel value (eg, a negative
value) allowed by the magnetic resonance apparatus.
Step 3: The ROI used for S is measured in step 1 to the same
position of image 3, and the standard deviation of the region of
interest (SD) is calculated. Divide the SD by the square root value
of 2 to eliminate the noise amplification caused by image subtrac-
tion and obtain image noise.
Step 4: Caculate SNR

5. Ghost value test method: Scan the Constancy Test_2 sequence

and measure the ghost value as follows:
Step 1: In the test mold, the signal average intensity value of the
region was read in a region of interest having an area of 20106
(circles, Φ =160) mm2.
Step 2: The noise regions in the upper, lower, left, and right direc-
tions of the image are taken as long (100) x wide (20) regions,
and the average pixel value of each region of interest is read.
Calculate the ratio of ghost to signal
( (Up +Down) - ( Left + Right)
=
(2 × (Central ROI) )

NPD-MRI-1301 8-10 System maintenance

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 9 Cleaning and disinfecting

This section provides information on cleaning and disinfection. Con-

ventional cleaning of magnetic resonance systems requires periodic
cleaning and disinfection of the coils, mattresses, and any parts that
come into contact with the patient.

WARNING! Read all warnings and cautions in Chapter 2

Safety before disinfecting and cleaning the sys-
tem, system components and accessories.

WARNING! Disconnect system power and component power

before cleaning and disinfecting electrical com-
ponents.

WARNING! Always wear protective goggles and gloves

when cleaning and disinfecting.

WARNING! Never allow water or other liquids to enter the

system. If liquid enters the system, contact your
service representative.

WARNING! Please remove spilled liquid immediately.

WARNING! All parts, coils and accessories of the system

must be thoroughly dried before starting the
inspection.

NPD-MRI-1301 9-1 Cleaning and disinfecting

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Use appropriate personal protection and precau-

tions when removing blood or residual contrast
agents. Blood and contrast agents are poten-
tially infectious.

NOTE Do not use detergents, organic solvents or abra-

sive cleaners to clean the device. Powerful clean-
ers, alcohols, and organic cleaners can damage
the polishing layer and can also weaken the
structure. Do not use if you are not sure about
the characteristics of the disinfectant.

NOTE It is recommended that the patient's magnet

bore, mattresses, alarm ball, headphones, coils
and accessories be cleaned and disinfected after
each patient's examination is completed.

NOTE It is recommended that all staff perform hand

cleaning and disinfection (hand sanitizer) after
completing each patient's examination.

NOTE To ensure cleanliness, it is recommended to

place a clean blanket or mattress on the patient's
skin in contact with the device. This also pre-
vents the patient from being allergic to the skin
due to contact with certain metals.

9.1 Cleaning
The system, system components and accessories need to be cleaned
before disinfection.
Cleaning refers to the removal of dust, soil, organic matter such as
blood, secretions, excretions and microorganisms by water, deter-
gent and mechanical action.

9.1.1 Cleaning process

Please follow the steps below to clean:
1. Wipe the hard surface with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
or detergent (preferably with liquid soap instead of disinfectant)
until all visible surface contaminants are removed.

NPD-MRI-1301 9-2 Cleaning and disinfecting

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

2. Use a cloth that picks up clean water to remove excess particles

and cleaning residue.
3. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
4. Dispose of used cleaning materials according to your organiza-
tion's handling procedures.

9.2 Disinfecting
Disinfection can inactivate pathogenic microorganisms. Disinfectants
are used for inanimate objects.

Table 9-1 Different classifications of disinfection

Classification Definition Disinfection level

Highly danger- Equipment enters sterile tissue Sterilization should be used.

ous goods (eg surgery applications)

Moderate risk Device contact with mucous Disinfection methods should be

Sexual goods membranes (eg intraluminal adopted to achieve the above
applications) level disinfection effect.

Low risk Device contact with intact skin It is advisable to use a low-level
Sexual goods disinfection method or a clean-
ing treatment: in the case of
pathogenic microbial contami-
nation, select an effective disin-
fection method for the type of
contaminating pathogenic
microorganism.

According to the different classifications of the disinfection in Table 9-

1, the disinfection of magnetic resonance systems, components and
accessories is classified as low-risk items, requiring moderate or low
level disinfection.
High-efficiency disinfectant: a disinfectant that kills all bacterial
propagules (including mycobacteria), viruses, fungi and their spores,
and also has a certain killing effect on bacterial spores.
Medium-effect disinfectant: a disinfectant that kills microorganisms
such as branching rods, fungi, viruses, and bacterial propagules.
Inefficient disinfectant: a disinfectant that kills bacterial propagules
and lipophilic viruses.

NOTE In some countries, disinfection has not been

divided into low, medium and high levels. The

NPD-MRI-1301 9-3 Cleaning and disinfecting

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

following factors will affect the effectiveness of

the disinfectant solution:

• Exposure duration
• Solution storage time
• Disinfectant concentration and effectiveness
• Number and location of pollution
• Contaminant resistance
• Organic matter on the disinfected project

9.2.1 Disinfectant and compatibility

Disinfectants in Table 9-2 Disinfectants should be used because their
chemical properties are compatible with the product materials.

Table 9-2 Disinfectant

Disinfectant Disinfection level

Isopropyl alcohol 70% Medium

70% ethanol Medium

Chlorhexidine 0.5%, soluble in Medium

70% ethanol

CAUTION! Neusoft only detects and recommends the disin-

fectant described here. Neusoft Medical is not
responsible for damage caused by the use of dif-
ferent products or ingredients.
CAUTION! Do not mix different disinfecting solutions as
they may generate harmful gases.
CAUTION! The use of iodine-containing or colored disinfec-
tants may cause discoloration of related materi-
als.
CAUTION! If using a pre-mixed solution, observe the shelf
life of the solution.

9.2.1.1 Use bleach (chlorine) as a disinfectant

Bleach is widely used as a disinfectant due to its price, availability
and efficacy.

NPD-MRI-1301 9-4 Cleaning and disinfecting

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

CAUTION! More than 500ppm of bleaching water is not rec-

ommended because it has not been tested for
chemical compatibility with the product materi-
als. The 250ppm bleaching solution was tested to
be compatible with system materials. Neusoft
Medical assumes no responsibility for damage
caused by the use of higher concentrations of
bleaching solutions.
CAUTION! The 500ppm chlorine solution is corrosive. Avoid
direct contact with skin and eyes.

NOTE Check the concentration of the bleach product

before use. Different bleach products may con-
tain different concentrations of available chlo-
rine:

• A 500ppm bleaching aqueous solution was used to

disinfect the surface.
• The 500ppm bleach solution is a powerful disinfectant
used to remove spilled blood or body fluids.

9.2.2 Disinfection process

Please follow the steps below to disinfect:
1. Please follow the cleaning steps to clean.
2. Wipe with a soft cloth that has been recommended to use the dis-
infectant.
3. When using alcohol: air dry the surface.
4. When using chlorine: Wipe the surface with a cloth dampened with
clean water to remove chlorine. Air dry or dry with a clean touch
cloth.
5. Dispose of used disinfectant materials according to your institu-
tion's handling procedures.

NPD-MRI-1301 9-5 Cleaning and disinfecting

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

9.3 Cleaning and disinfection of system compo-

nents and accessories

9.3.1 Patient table

After each patient is examined, it is necessary to clean and disinfect
the patient table. Clean and disinfect in accordance with Chapter 9.1.1
Cleaning processand Chapter 9.2.2 Disinfection process.
Use a soft cloth or paper towel to thoroughly remove solid material
from the patient bed groove. Use a toothpick for hard-to-reach areas.

9.3.2 Mattresses
Regularly inspect the surfaces of accessories such as mattresses,
wedge mattresses and sandbags for cracks, tears or abrasion. If
there is a break, tear or wear, it must be removed and replaced
immediately. Do not use patches to repair cracks and holes. Patches
do not provide an impermeable surface.
After each patient is examined, it is necessary to clean and disinfect
the mattresses. Clean and disinfect in accordance with Chapter 9.1.1
Cleaning processand Chapter 9.2.2 Disinfection process.

9.3.3 Coils
After each patient is examined, it is necessary to clean and disinfect
the coils. Clean and disinfect in accordance with Chapter 9.1.1 Clean-
ing processand Chapter 9.2.2 Disinfection process.

WARNING! Do not spray or spray the cleaning solution

directly onto the receiving coil and connecting
cable. Wipe the surface of the receiving coil and
the connecting cable gently with a soft cotton
towel and a cleaning solution.

WARNING! Do not immerse the receiving coil in the cleaning

solution while cleaning it.

NPD-MRI-1301 9-6 Cleaning and disinfecting

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Always unplug the connecting cable before

cleaning the receiving coil.

NOTE You can prepare some clean and clean clothes,

shoes, towels, etc. for the patient to avoid direct
contact with the patient's skin. These clothes
should be cleaned and disinfected regularly.

9.3.4 Magnet bore

After each patient is examined, it is necessary to clean and disinfect
the magnet bore. Clean and disinfect in accordance with Chapter 9.1.1
Cleaning processand Chapter 9.2.2 Disinfection process.

9.3.5 Headphone and alarm ball

After each patient is examined, it is necessary to clean and disinfect
the headphone and the alarm ball. Clean and disinfect in accordance
with Chapter 9.1.1 Cleaning processand Chapter 9.2.2 Disinfection pro-
cess.

9.3.6 Connetors
The connector includes coil slot connector of the upper and lower
opening structure, coil cable connector, and receive coil connector on
the magnet cover. Clean in accordance with Chapter 9.1.1 Cleaning
process.

WARNING! Do not touch the connectors with your bare fin-

gers.

WARNING! Do not touch the connectors directly with a

sharp object.

NPD-MRI-1301 9-7 Cleaning and disinfecting

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

WARNING! Make sure that shut down the entire MRI system
before cleaning the connectors.

NPD-MRI-1301 9-8 Cleaning and disinfecting

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Chapter 10 Appendices

10.1Product disposal
We concern to help protect natural environment, and to help ensure
continued safe and effective use of the NeuMR 1.5T system through
proper support, maintenance and training.
Therefore our equipment is designed and manufactured to comply
with relevant guidelines for environmental protection. As long as the
equipment is properly operated and maintained, it presents no envi-
ronmental risks. However the equipment may contain materials
which could be harmful to the environment if disposed of incorrectly.
Use of such materials is essential to performing the functions of the
equipment, and to meeting statutory and other requirements.
Operators are not usually involved in disposal. For advice and infor-
mation, contact your Service Organization first.

10.1.1Passing the NeuMR 1.5T system on to an other

user
If the NeuMR 1.5T system is to be passed on to another user who
intends to use it for its intended purpose, then it should be passed on
in its complete state. In particular, the existing user should make
sure that all the product support documentation - including the
instructions for use - is passed on to the new user.
A new user should be made aware of the support services that we
provide for installing, commissioning and maintaining the equipment
or system, and for the comprehensive training of operators.
It must be remembered by all existing users that passing on medical
electrical equipment to new users may create serious technical, med-
ical, and legal risks. Such risks can arise even if the equipment is
given away.
Once the equipment has been passed on to a new user, a previous
user may still receive important safety-related information, such as
bulletins and field change orders. In many jurisdictions, there is a
clear duty on the previous user to communicate such safety-related
information to the new users. Previous users who are not able or pre-
pared to do this should inform us about the new user, so that we can
provide the new user with the safety-related information.

NPD-MRI-1301 10-1 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

10.1.2Final disposal of NeuMR 1.5T

Final disposal is when the user disposes of the equipment or system
in such a way that it can no longer be used for its intended purpose.

WARNING! Do not dispose NeuMR 1.5T MRI system(or any

parts of it) with industrial or domestic waste.
This system contains hazardous material(s)
which require(s) special disposal. Incorrect dis-
posal of these materials may lead to serious
environmental pollution.
Pay special attention to
• Cooling fluids
• Phantom fluids
• Batteries
• Magnet
• LCD
For details, please contact your local customer service representative
of Neusoft local office.

NOTE System components that are harmful to humans

and the environment must be handled with care
according to regulations.

10.2Glossary
This glossary contains a list of abbreviations and short explanations
for some vocabulary of common MRI and computer terms.

NOTE Some of the abbreviations can have other mean-

ings in other contexts. The list below only
includes interpretations that are applicable to
the NeuMR 1.5T product family and their docu-
mentation.

NPD-MRI-1301 10-2 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

10.2.1Abbreviations
Table 10-1 Abbreviations
ADC map Apparent coefficient maps

AIP Average intensity projection

Angio Angiography

ASL Arterial spin labeling

B FFE Balanced Fast Field Echo

BMP Bitmap

B0 A conventional symbol for the constant magnetic field in

an MRI system.

B1 A conventional symbol for the radio frequency magnetic

field used in a MRI system.

CBF Cerebral blood flow

CBV Cerebral blood volume

CE-MRA Contrast enhanced 3D magnetic resonance angiogra-

phy.

COR Coronal

dB/dt The rate of change of the magnetic field (induction)

with time.

DCE Dynamic contrast enhanced

DE Dual Echo

DICOM The Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine

(DICOM) standard is an industry standard format for
medical imaging data (images and associated informa-
tion).

DSC Dynamic susceptibility contrast enhanced

DSE Dual spin echo

DTSE Dual turbo spin echo

FA Flip angle

FFE Fast field echo

FFE3D Three-dimensional (3D) acquisition using fast field echo

(FFE).

FLAIR Fluid attenuated IR

fMRI Functional magnetic resonance imaging

NPD-MRI-1301 10-3 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-1 Abbreviations (Continued)

FOV Field of view

Halfscan Half scan

IR Inversion recovery

IRSE Inversion recovery spin echo

IRTSE Inversion recovery turbo spin echo

MIP Maximum intensity projection

MinIP Minimum intensity projection

MPR Multi-planar reformatting

MR (Nuclear) magnetic resonance (NMR).

MRCP Magnetic resonance cholangiopancre atography

MRI Magnetic resonance imaging.

The production of NMR images.

MTT Mean transit time

Partial Echo Known as “fractional echo”.

PD Proton density

PDW Proton density weighted.

QA Quality assurance.

RR Reconstruction resolution

RF Radio frequency

ROI Region of interest

RPD Relative proton density

SAG Sagittal

SAR Specific absorption rate

SE Spin echo

SENSE SENSitivity

SNR Signal-to-noise ratio

SSD Shaded surface display

STIR Short TI inversion recovery

SWI Susceptibility weighted imaging

T Tesla

TE Echo time

NPD-MRI-1301 10-4 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-1 Abbreviations (Continued)

TF Turbo factor

THRIFT Throughput heightened rapid increased flip T2

TI Inversion time

TOF Time of flight

TR Repetition time

TRA Transverse

TSE Turbo spin echo

TTP Time to peak

T1 The time constant of the spin-lattice (longitudinal)

relaxation.

T1W T1-weighted

T2 The time constant of the spin-spin (transverse) relax-

ation.

T2W T2-weighted

T2* “T-Two-Star”: The characteristic time constant for

reversible and irreversible loss of phase coherence
among spins oriented at an angle to the static magnetic
field due to magnetic field inhomogeneities, with result-
ing loss of transverse magnetization and NMR signal.

VR Volume rendering

2D Two-dimensional

3D Three-dimensional

NPD-MRI-1301 10-5 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

10.2.2MRI and computer terminology

Table 10-2 Terminology
Artifact A false feature in the image produced by the imaging process.

Attenuation The term used to indicate signal reduction.

Bandwidth The bandwidth is the range of frequencies sampled and used to

form the image when the echo generated by the RF excitation
pulse is read. There is a proportional relationship between the
amount of time used to sample the signal and the resultant
(sampling) bandwidth. The longer the echo is sampled, the nar-
rower the bandwidth. Conversely, the shorter the sampling time,
the wider the bandwidth.

Booting Starting a computer system.

Cardiac gating Cardiac gating is a triggered data-acquisition process, where

the ECG R-wave or peak of the peripheral pulse initiates the
imaging cycle. The R-to-R time interval, or multiples of it, deter-
mines the view-to view repeat time. Software-selectable timing
parameters allow imaging to occur at user-determined points in
the cardiac cycle. On NeuMR 1.5T scanners, cardiac gating is a
purchasable option.

Chemical shift A chemical shift is the resonant frequency difference between

protons (hydrogen nuclei) in different sites within a molecule or
between protons in different molecules. Chemical shifts make
possible the differentiation of different molecular compounds,
for example, fat and water.
Technically speaking, a chemical shift is the change in the Lar-
mor frequency of a given nucleus when bound in different sites
in a molecule, due to the magnetic shielding effects of the elec-
tron orbitals. The amount of the shift is proportional to magnetic
field strength and is usually specified in parts per million (ppm)
of the resonance frequency relative to a standard. The fre-
quency shift between fat and water is approximately 3.5 parts
per million (ppm), which is about 64 Hz for NeuMR 1.5T’s 1.5 T.
Chemical shift contributes to image contrast in fast field echo
(FFE) imaging. The signal is susceptible to the frequency differ-
ences between fat and water spins. At specific echo times (TE
s), the fat and water phase relationship.

cine A software feature that lets you replay images in rapid cinematic
display. You can use a cine loop display to show a series of
images, to simulate motion, or to provide the perception of
depth. For example, these images could be created from car-
diac applications, where adding the motion in the cine display
shows the motion in flow of blood through the heart. The images
could also be created using flow imaging techniques, such as
cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) flow through the spinal cord to evalu-
ate obstructions.

NPD-MRI-1301 10-6 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-2 Terminology

click A click is the quick pushing and releasing of the mouse button in
one motion.

coil Single or multiple loops of wire (or other electrical conductors,

such as tubing, etc.) designed either to produce a magnetic field
from current flowing through the wire, or to detect a changing
magnetic field by voltage induced in the wire.

coherence Maintenance of a constant phase relationship between rotating

or oscillating waves or objects. Loss of phase coherence of the
spins results in a decrease in the transverse magnetization and,
hence, a decrease in the MRI signal.

contrast Contrast can be defined as the relative difference of the signal

intensities in two adjacent regions. In a general sense, we can
consider image contrast, where the strength of the image inten-
sity in adjacent regions of the image is compared, or object con-
trast, where the relative values of a parameter affecting the
image (such as spin density or relaxation time) in corresponding
adjacent regions of the object are compared. If the two intensi-
ties are J1 and J2, a useful quantitative definition of contrast is
(J1 - J2) / (J1 + J2). Relating image contrast to object contrast is
more difficult in MRI imaging than in conventional radiography,
as there are more object parameters affecting the image and
their relative contributions are very dependent on the particular
imaging technique used. As in other kinds of imaging, image
contrast in MRI will also depend on region size, as reflected
through the modulation transfer function (MTF) characteristics.

controlled access An area with limited access due to the existence of magnetic
area fields and their attractive forces on ferromagnetic material.

coronal Orientation. The patient’s right to the left side of the image,
superior or head on the top

double click Clicking the mouse button twice in rapid succession. (Compare
with click.)

database An ordered collection of information.

diffusion imaging Water diffusion is a contrast mechanism in MRI. Diffusion imag-

ing is one method of brain examinations.

dragging A drag occurs when you position the mouse pointer, hold down
a mouse button, move the mouse, and then release the mouse
button. To drag with the mouse, you must be holding the mouse
button down while moving the pointer.

excitation Putting energy into the spin system; if a net transverse magneti-
zation is produced, an NMR signal can be observed.

NPD-MRI-1301 10-7 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-2 Terminology

Fast field echo An imaging technique. A fast field echo (FFE) sequence is a
gradient echo sequence that consists of a single RF pulse fol-
lowed by a gradient reversal operation that rephrases the spins
to form an echo. This is done by reversing the sign of the fre-
quency encoding gradient.FFE contains no 180° refocusing
pulse.

ferromagnetic A substance, such as iron, that has a large positive magnetic

susceptibility.

filling factor A measure of the geometrical relationship of the RF coil and the
body. It affects the efficiency of irradiating the body and detect-
ing NMR signals, thereby affecting the signal-to-noise ratio and,
ultimately, image quality. Achieving a high filling factor requires
fitting the coil closely to the body, thus potentially decreasing
patient comfort.

first level controlled At this level, some of the MRI system’s operating para T2-
operating mode weighted Turbo Spin Echo Inversion Recovery meters reach
values that may cause undue physiological stress to patients.
NeuMR 1.5T may reach the first level controlled operating mode
due to SAR exceeding limit value. The scanners will not enter
this operating mode without operator intervention. Please famil-
iarize yourself with the instructions in the Chapter 2 Safety.
(Compare with normal operating mode.)

flip angle The flip angle is the angle the magnetization is tilted due to the
first RF pulse.

Fourier transform The Fourier transform is a mathematical procedure to separate

out the frequency components of a signal from its amplitudes as
a function of time, or vice versa. The Fourier transform is used
to generate the spectrum from the FID in pulse NMR techniques
and is essential to most imaging techniques.

free induction decay If transverse magnetization of the spins is produced, e.g. by a

(FID) 90° pulse, a transient NMR signal will result that will decay
toward zero with a characteristic time constant T2 (or T2*). This
decaying signal is the FID. In practice, the first part of the FID is
not observable due to residual effects of the powerful exciting
RF pulse on the electronics of the receiver. (Exciting pulse: see
excitation.)

gain The term used to indicate signal amplification.

gating Enabling and disabling image acquisition.

gating delay Gating delay is a user-specified time that delays the start of the
scan sequence image acquisition from the time that the com-
puter receives the trigger or interruption of signal.

NPD-MRI-1301 10-8 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-2 Terminology

gauss (G) The unit of magnetic flux density in the CGS system. The
earth’s magnetic field is approximately one half gauss depend-
ing on location. The currently preferred unit in the SI system is
the tesla (T). 1 G = 0.1 mT = 100 mT and 1 T = 10,000 G.

gradient 1. The amount and direction (or the vector) of the rate of change
in space of some quantity, such as magnetic field strength.
2. In loose speech sometimes used instead of “gradient coil” or
“gradient magnetic field”.

gradient coils Gradient coils are current carrying coils designed to produce a
desired gradient magnetic field (so that the magnetic field will be
stronger in some locations than others). Proper design of the
size and configuration of the coils is necessary to produce a
controlled and uniform gradient.

gradient A magnetic field that increases in strength in a certain given

magnetic field direction. Such fields are used in NMR imaging with selective
excitation to select a region for imaging and also to encode the
location of NMR signals received from the object being imaged.
The fields are measured (e.g.) in teslas per meter. (Compare
with gradient. Teslas: see gauss.)

gradient pulse A briefly applied gradient magnetic field.

gyro magnetic ratio The ratio of the magnetic moment to the angular momentum of
(g) a particle. This is a constant for a given nucleus.

homogeneity Uniformity. In MRI, the homogeneity of the static magnetic field

is an important criterion of the quality of the magnet. Homoge-
neity requirements for MRI are generally lower than the homo-
geneity requirements for NMR spectroscopy, but in most
imaging techniques homogeneity must be maintained over a
larger region.

imaging time Time required to produce an NMR image, comprising only the
data acquisition time. The additional image reconstruction time
will also determine how quickly the image can be viewed.

in-plane resolution In-plane resolution is the resolution in the image plane. It is

determined by the pixel dimensions.

interpulse time Times between successive RF pulses used in pulse sequences.

Particularly important are the inversion time (TI) in inversion
recovery, and the repetition time (TR).

inversion A non equilibrium state in which the macroscopic magnetization

vector is oriented opposite to the magnetic field. Usually pro-
duced by adiabatic fast passage or 180° RF pulses.

NPD-MRI-1301 10-9 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-2 Terminology

inversion recovery An imaging technique. In Inversion Recovery sequences, there
is a selective 180° inversion pulse before the usual FFE (for IR),
SE (for IRSE), or TSE (for IRTSE) sequence operations. They
enable an extended range of image contrast, compared to SE
and FFE sequences.

longitudinal The component of the macroscopic magnetization vector along

magnetization (Mz) the static magnetic field. Following excitation by RF pulse, Mz
will approach its equilibrium value Mo with a characteristic time
constant T1.

longitudinal relaxation Return of longitudinal magnetization to its equilibrium value

after excitation. Requires exchange of energy between the
nuclear spins and the lattice.

magnetic susceptibil- Magnetizability, a measure of the ability of a substance to

ity become magnetized.

normal operating- At this level, all of the MRI system’s operating parameters are
mode within recommended limits for protection against safety haz-
ards, and performance requires only routine patient monitoring.
(Some patients may always require additional monitoring and
other precautions. Please familiarize yourself with the instruc-
tions in Chapter 2 Safety.)

Paramagnetic sub- A substance with a small but positive magnetic susceptibility.

stance The addition of a small amount of a paramagnetic substance
may greatly reduce the relaxation times of water. Typical para-
magnetic substances usually possess an unpaired electron and
include atoms or ions of transition elements, rare-earth ele-
ments, some metals, and some molecules including molecular
oxygen and free radicals. Paramagnetic substances are consid-
ered promising for use as contrast agents in NMR imaging.

phantom A mechanical object of known dimensions and properties used

to test imaging equipment.

phase imaging Phase imaging produces images in which image intensity repre-
sents the phase of the MR signal. Phase imaging is an effective
tool in visualizing the distribution of water and fat in tissues.

presaturation Presaturation is the application of a selective RF pulse to satu-

rate (see saturation) unwanted structures or anatomy to remove
their signal contribution to the overall image and their ability to
create artifacts. Presaturation regions can be positioned and
applied as required by the user, or placed in image relative posi-
tions outside the acquired FOV or range of acquired slices.
Presaturation slabs are regions to which presaturation pulses
are applied.

NPD-MRI-1301 10-10 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-2 Terminology

protocol A protocol consists of one or more items that control the opera-
tion of the scanner. The items in a protocol that collect data and
produce images are called sequences. Protocols are usually
organized by anatomical region. Several predefined standard
protocols come with the scanner, but you can also develop pro-
tocols of your own.

receive coil The coil of the RF receiver.

relaxation times After excitation, the spins will tend to return to their equilibrium
distribution, in which there is no transverse magnetization and
the longitudinal magnetization is at its maximum value and ori-
ented in the direction of the static magnetic field. It is observed
that in the absence of applied RF, the transverse magnetization
decays toward zero with a characteristic time constant T2, and
the longitudinal magnetization returns toward the equilibrium
value Mo with a characteristic time constant T1.

resolution Real or true resolution is all the information used for the image
reconstruction that is acquired. Nominal resolution is the part of
the information of the image that is achieved by some method,
as interpolation or zero padding.In-plane resolution is resolution
in the imaging plane. Spatial resolution is the product of in-plane
resolution and slicethickness. Spatial resolution measures the
capability to perceivetwo adjacent anatomies or points.
Temporal resolution is the time interval between two images,
when time dependent or dynamic phenomena are followed up.

saturation A non equilibrium state of NMR, in which equal numbers of

spins are aligned against and with the magnetic field, so that
there is no net magnetization. Can be produced by repeatedly
supplying RF pulses at the Larmor frequency with => interpulse
times short compared to T1.

sequence A sequence is a description of a single scan to be performed by

the scan subsystem and any related pre- and post-processing.

shimming The process of providing auxiliary magnetic fields in order to

compensate for inhomogeneities in the main magnetic field.

simultaneous volume See volume imaging.

imaging

signal-to-noise ratio The signal-to-noise ratio (SNR or S/N) is a term used to

describe the relative contributions to a detected signal of the
true signal and random superimposed signals (noise). It is
defined as the ratio of the image signal to the standard deviation
of the system noise level.

NPD-MRI-1301 10-11 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-2 Terminology

spin echo The Spin Echo (SE) sequence is one the most commonly used
sequences in MRI. Spin Echo sequences use the spin echo sig-
nal rather than the FID. Spin echo is a reappearance of an NMR
signal after the FID has died away. It is a result of the effective
reversal of the dephasing of the spins (“refocusing”). Refocus-
ing can be achieved by such techniques as “time reversal”by
reversal of a gradient magnetic field (as in FFE), or by specific
RF pulse sequences (as in SE). Multiple spin echoes or a series
of spin echoes at different times can be used to determine T2
without contamination by effects of the inhomogeneity of the
magnetic field. Note that spin echoes do not directly produce an
image of T2, but SE sequences can be used to create images
that depend strongly on T2. These T2-weighted sequences
have a high sensitivity for various pathologies.

three dimensional 3D imaging techniques excite a volume (slab) of tissue rather

(3D) imaging than individual slices as with 2D imaging. Slices within the slab
are encoded by a secondary phase gradient. In-plane pixels are
encoded by phase and readout gradients.
(Exciting: see excitation.)

transverse magnetiza- The component of the macroscopic magnetization vector at

tion (Mxy) right angles to the static magnetic field (Bo). Precession of the
transverse magnetization at the Larmor frequency is responsi-
ble for the detectable NMR signal. In the absence of externally
applied RF energy, the transverse magnetization will decay to
zero with a characteristic time constant of T2 or T2*.

turbo spin echo Turbo Spin Echo (TSE) is a modification of the ordinary Spin E
cho (SE) sequence. TSE provides T2-weighted contrast in a
shorter scan time than the SE sequence without a significant
loss in the signal-to-noise ratio or in the contrast-to-noise ratio.
Shorter scan time is achieved by using more than one echo,
each with its own phase encoding.

two-dimensional (2D) In 2D imaging, RF pulses and a slice gradient are used to selec-
imaging tively excite single slices of tissue. The thickness and position of
each slice are functions of the gradient strength and frequency
of the RF pulse. The voxel thickness is equal to the thickness of
the excited slice.
(Exciting: see excitation.)

NPD-MRI-1301 10-12 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-2 Terminology

volume imaging Imaging techniques in which NMR signals are gathered from
the whole object volume to be imaged at once, with appropriate
encoding pulse/ gradient sequences to encode positions of the
spins. Many sequential plane imaging techniques can be gener-
alized to volume imaging, at least in principle. Advantages
include potential improvement in signal-to-noise ratio by includ-
ing signal from the whole volume at once; disadvantages
include a bigger computational task for image reconstruction
and longer image acquisition times (although the entire volume
can be imaged from the one set of data). Also called simulta-
neous volume imaging.

workstation The collective name for the parts of a small computer system
that is designed for interactive use by one operator at a time.
The NeuMR 1.5T console is a typical workstation.

10.3 Labels on the NeuMR 1.5T

Table 10-3 labels on the system

NPD-MRI-1301 10-13 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

NPD-MRI-1301 10-14 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

AIM NV Top label

NPD-MRI-1301 10-15 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

NPD-MRI-1301 10-16 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

NPD-MRI-1301 10-17 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

Labels on the package

NPD-MRI-1301 10-18 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

Thermax

NPD-MRI-1301 10-19 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

Magnet electronics labe

NPD-MRI-1301 10-20 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

Magnet related labels

Magnet warning label Magnet warning label

Magnet related label Magnet related label

Compressor related label Compressor related label

Compressor related label Compressor warning label

NPD-MRI-1301 10-21 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

Compressor warning label Compressor warning label

Compressor warning label Compressor warning label

Compressor warning label Compressor warning label

Work station label

Keyboard label RF Amplifier label

NPD-MRI-1301 10-22 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

NPD-MRI-1301 10-23 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-3 labels on the system

Table 10-4 Signs on the package

Sign Description

This way up

Fragile, handle with care

Keep dry

Do not stack

Temperature limit

NPD-MRI-1301 10-24 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

Table 10-4 Signs on the package

Sign Description

Humidity limitation

Atmospheric pressure limitation

NPD-MRI-1301 10-25 Appendices

Rev. A
NeuMR 1.5T
User Manual

NPD-MRI-1301 10-26 Appendices

Rev. A
Neusoft Medical Systems Co., Ltd.
Address: No. 177-1 Chuangxin Road, Hunnan District, Shenyang, Liaoning, China

Postcode: 110167

Email: [email protected]

Http://www.neusoftmedical.com/en

Emergo Europe
Prinsessegracht 20
2514 AP The Hague
The Netherlands

Copyright by Neusoft Medical Systems Co., Ltd.

10168691